Manualslib.com - Simplified Manuals
Manuals / Brands / Monarch Manuals / Controller / NICE1000 / User manual / PDF
MONARCH NICE1000 USER MANUAL
Quick Links
Electrical Wiring Diagram of the Nice1000
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
Fault Information and Troubleshooting
Table of Contents
Preface
First-time Use
Introduction
Product Checking
Standard Compliance
Comparison with the NICE1000
Introduction
Connection to peripheral devices
Basic function list
Table of Contents
Safety Precautions
General Precautions
Requirement on the residual current device (RCD)
High leakage current warning
Motor insulation test
Thermal protection of motor
Motor heat and noise
Contactor on the input and output sides of the controller
Use outside the rated voltage
Surge suppressor
Altitude and de-rating
Disposal
Protective Functions
Speed abnormal
Drive control abnormal
Encoder abnormal
System Configuration of the NICE1000
Designation Rules and Model Description
Models and Specifications
Technical Specifications
Physical Appearance and Mounting Dimensions
L structure, 2.2–15 kW
L structure, 18–22 KW, 30 –37 KW
L structure, 45–55 kW
Mounting dimensions of the NICE1000
Optional Parts
Optional parts of the NICE1000
Selection of Braking Components
Appearance and dimensions of braking unit
Braking resistor selection for the NICE1000
Installation Requirements
Installation Environment Requirements
Installation Clearance Requirements
Clearance around the NICE1000 for installation
Mechanical Installation
Diagram of mounting holes
Electrical Installation
Terminal Arrangement
Description of Main Circuit Terminals
Main circuit terminal arrangement
Wiring of the main circuit
Description of Control Circuit Terminals
Description of indicators on the MCB
Description of the MCTC-KZ-D Extension Card
Appearance and installation of the MCTC-KZ-D
Mounting dimensions of the MCTC-KZ-D
Function description of terminals
Indicators
Description of indicators on the MCTC-KZ-D
Selection and Use of the MCTC-PG Card
Selection of the MCTC-PG card models
Terminal wiring and description
Wring between MCTC-PG-E and the controller
Definitions of the CN1 terminals of different MCTC-PG card models
Precautions on connecting the MCTC-PG card
Selection of Adaptable Motor
Selection and Use of the Hall Display Board
Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices
Description of Peripheral Electrical Devices
Specification of peripheral electrical devices for selection
Electrical Wiring Diagram of the NICE1000
Installation of Shaft Position Signals
new Control System
Arrangement of shaft position signals
Installation of Leveling Signals
Installation requirements of leveling switches
Installation of Slow-Down Switches
Slow-down distances based on different rated elevator speeds
Installation of Limit Switches
Installation of Final Limit Switches
Use of the LED Operation Panel
Diagram of the LED operation panel
Description of Indicators
Description of Keys on the Operation Panel
Operation Procedure
Operation procedure on the operation panel
Viewing Status Parameters
Shift between parameters displayed in the stop state
Shift between parameters displayed in the running state
Commissioning procedure of the system
Check Before Commissioning
Check the encoder
Check the power supply before power-on
Setting and Auto-tuning of Motor Parameters
Motor Parameters to Be Set
Check the grounding
Precautions for Motor Auto-tuning
Motor auto-tuning process
Output State of RUN and Brake Contactors
Trial Running at Normal Speed
Door Machine Controller Commissioning
Door open limit monitoring
Door 1 open limit monitoring (F5-28)
Riding Comfort
Controller Output
Running time sequence
Mechanical Construction
Password Setting
Example of changing the password
System Application
Emergency Evacuation at Power Failure
Emergency 220 V UPS
Various contacts of the contactors
Parameter setting under the 220 V UPS scheme
Emergency ARD Power Supply
Three-phase emergency ARD power supply
Single-phase emergency ARD power supply
Parameter setting under the ARD scheme
Shorting PMSM Stator
Wiring of the independent shorting PMSM stator contactor
Parameter setting under the shorting PMSM stator scheme
Parameter description of F6-69
Parallel Control of Two Elevators
Parameter Setting
Wiring for Parallel Control Communication
Function Description
Parameter and address setting of two elevators
Opposite Door Control
Opposite door control modes and parameter setting
Function Code Description
Function Code Groups
Chapter 6 Function Code Table
Function Code Table
Group F0: Basic Parameters
0: Sensorless vector control (SVC)
Distance control
Influences of carrier frequency adjustment
Group F1: Motor Parameter
No-load auto-tuning
Group F2: Vector Control Parameters
Relationship between running frequencies and PI parameters
Elevator running direction
Zero servo current coefficient
Torque acceleration time
Torque deceleration time
Group F3: Running Control Parameters
Deceleration end jerk time 0.300-4.000
Deceleration start jerk time 0.300-4.000
F3-05 Deceleration rate
Function Code
Setting the running curve
distance
F3-10 Re-leveling speed
F3-11 Inspection speed
F3-15 Brake release delay
Position of up slow-down
Special deceleration rate 0.200-2.000
Acceleration rate at emergency evacuation
F4-00 Leveling adjustment
Group F4: Floor Parameters
F4-01 Current floor F6-01 to F6-00
High byte of current floor position 0-65535
Length 1 of leveling plate
Length 2 of leveling plate
Group F5: Input Terminal Parameters
Attendant/Automatic switchover time
X1 function selection
X2 function selection
Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback
First fire emergency signal
Overload signal
Full-load signal
Attendant signal
Direct travel ride signal
Direction change signal
UPS valid signal
Motor overheat signal
Earthquake signal
Back door forbidden signal
Light-load signal
Invalid
Safety circuit signal
Door lock circuit 1 signal
Door lock circuit 2 signal
Meaning of the LED segments for F5-28
Meaning of the LED segments for F5-29
Floor I/O terminal state (F5-30)
Meaning of the LED segments for F5-30
Meaning of the LED segments for F5-31
Group F6: Basic Elevator Parameters
Top floor of the elevator
Bottom floor of the elevator
Parking floor
Service floors
Converting binary value of F6-05 to decimal
Functions indicated by bits of F6-06
Elevator function control 1
Reserved
Viewing F6-06 in bit
Viewing bits cyclically
Elevator function control 2
Fault auto reset
F6-07 Elevator function control 2
Arrow blinking interval
Random test times
Bit0: Hall call forbidden
L2 function selection
L49 function selection
L50 function selection
Leveling sensor delay
Soft limit function
Attendant-related functions indicated by bits of F6-67
F6-68 Fire Emergency Function Selection
F6-69 Emergency Evacuation Function Selection
Emergency evacuation functions indicated by bits of F6-69
Emergency evacuation switching speed
Evacuation parking floor
Blinking advance time
Group F7: Output Terminal Parameters
Y0 function selection
Y1 function selection
Y2 function selection
Group F8: Enhanced Function Parameters
Load for load cell auto-tuning
Pre-torque selection
Pre-torque offset
Drive gain
Brake gain
Current car load
Car no-load load
Group F9: Time Parameters
Brake apply delay
Fire emergency floor 2
Idle time before returning to base floor
Motor running time limit
Accumulative running time
High byte of running times
Low byte or running times
Group FA: Keypad Setting Parameters
Display in stop state
Stop parameters corresponding to 16 bits of FA-02
Overload output
Arrival gong output
Current encoder angle
Control board software
Controller model
Pre-torque current
Logic information
LED display of the elevator state
Curve information
Set speed
Feedback speed
Present position
Communication quality display
Example of input state display
Group Fb: Door Function Parameters
System state
Number of door machine (s)
Opposite door control mode
Service floors of door machine 1
Service floors of door machine 2
Holding time of manual door open
Program control selection
Door close protection time
Door open/close protection times
Door open holding time for hall call
Door open holding time upon open delay valid
Arrival gong output delay
Door lock waiting time at manual door
Group FC: Protection Function Parameters
Program control functions indicated by bits of FC-00
FC-00 Program control for protection function
FC-01 Program control 2 for protection function
Overload protection coefficient
Overload pre-warning coefficient
Designated fault
Designated fault code
Designated fault subcode
Group Fd: Communication Parameters
Local address
Communication response delay
Communication timeout
Group FE: Elevator Function Parameters
10: Low 7-segment a display output
11: Low 7-segment b display output
12: Low 7-segment c display output
Elevator function selection 1
Elevator functions indicated by bits of FE-13
Elevator functions indicated by bits of FE-14
Group Fr: Leveling Adjustment Parameters
FE-14 Elevator Function Selection 2
Viewing the leveling adjustment record
Group FF: Factory Parameters
Group FP: User Parameters
Parameter update
User-defined parameter display
Troubleshooting
Maintenance
Routine Maintenance
Periodic Inspection
Replacement of Vulnerable Components
Service life of cooling fan and filter electrolytic capacitor
Storage of the Controller
Description of Fault Levels
Fault levels
Fault Information and Troubleshooting
EMC
Definition of Terms
First environment
Second environment
Category C1 Controller
Introduction to EMC Standard
Requirements on Satisfying the EMC Directive
Selection of Peripheral EMC Devices
Installation of EMC Input Filter on Power Input Side
Recommended manufacturers and models of EMC filter
Installation of AC Input Reactor on Power Input Side
Recommended manufacturers and models of AC input reactors
Shielded Cable
Requirements for the Shielded Cable
Installation Precautions of the Shielded Cable
Grounding of the shielded cable
Cabling Requirement
Cabling diagram
Solutions to Common EMC Interference Problems
Data code:19010227
Integrated Elevator Controller
User Manual V0.0
new
NICE1000
new
NICE1000
Integrated Elevator ControllerDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Preface- 1 -
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the NICE1000 new integrated elevator controller.
The NICE1000 new is a new-generation integrated elevator controller independently
developed and manufacturered by Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd., by
optimizing the NICE1000 controller based on a large number of applications and combining
new industrial features.
The NICE1000 new has the following advantages:
1. It supports high-performance vector control and open-loop low speed running. It can
drive both AC asynchronous motor and permanent magnetic synchronous motor
(PMSM), and implement switchover between the two types of motors easily by modifying
only one parameter.
2. It supports open-loop low-speed running, direct parallel control of two elevators, and
CANbus and Modbus communication protocols for remote monitoring.
3. It supports a maximum of 16 floors and is widely applied to elevators used in the villa
and freight elevators.
This manual describes the correct use of the NICE1000 new
, including product features,
safety information and precautions, installation, parameter setting, commissioning, and
maintenance & inspection. Read and understand the manual before using the product, and
keep it carefully for reference to future maintenance.
The personnel who involve in system installation, commissioning, and maintenance must
receive necessary safety and use training, understand this manual thoroughly, and have
related experience before performing operations.
Notes
• The drawings in the manual are sometimes shown without covers or protective guards.
Remember to install the covers or protective guards as specified first, and then perform
operations in accordance with the instructions.
• The drawings in the manual are shown for description only and may not match the product
you purchased.
• The instructions are subject to change, without notice, due to product upgrade, specification
modification as well as efforts to increase the accuracy and convenience of the manual.
• Contact our agents or customer service center if you need a new user manual or have
problems during the use.
• Email: UM@inovance.cnDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Introduction NICE1000new User Manual- 2 -
■ Product Checking
Upon unpacking, check:
• Whether the nameplate model and controller ratings are consistent with your order. The
box contains the controller, certificate of conformity, user manual and warranty card.
• Whether the controller is damaged during transportation. If you find any omission or
damage, contact your supplier or Monarch immediately.
■ First-time Use
For users who use this product for the first time, read the manual carefully. If you have any
problem concerning the functions or performance, contact the technical support personnel
of Monarch to ensure correct use.
■ CE Mark
The CE mark on the NICE1000 new declares that the controller complies with the European
low voltage directive (LVD) and EMC directive.
■ Standard Compliance
The NICE1000 new series controller complies with the following LVD and EMC directives and
standards:
Directive Directive Code Standard
EMC Directive 2004/18/EC
EN 61800-3: 2004+A1: 2012
EN 12015: 2004
EN 12016: 2004+A1: 2008
LVD Directive 2006/95/EC EN 61800-5-1
The NICE1000 new series controller complies with the requirements of the EMC standard on
the condition of correct installation and use by following the instructions in chapter 9 "EMC".Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Introduction- 3 -
Introduction
1. Comparison with the NICE1000
The following table lists the comparison between the NICE1000 new and the NICE1000.
Item NICE1000 NICE1000 new
Maximum number of floors Standard: 6
(can be extended to 8)
Standard: 8
(can be extended to 16)
Maximum elevator speed 1 m/s 1.75 m/s
I/O terminals
• Digital input: 24
• Button input and indicator
output: standard 20 (can be
extended to 26)
• Relay output: standard 21
(can be extended to 24)
• Higher-voltage input: 3
• Digital input: 24
• Button input and indicator
output: standard 26 (can
be extended to 50)
• Relay output: standard 21
(can be extended to 27)
• Higher-voltage input: 3
CANbus None 1 x CANbus
Modbus None 1 x Modbus
Motor driving type
Separate control for
synchronous and
asynchronous motors
Integrated control
for synchronous and
asynchronous motors
No-load-cell startup Supporting SIN/COS encoder
only
Supporting:
• Push-pull encoder
• Open-collector incremental
encoder
• UVW encoder
• SIN/COS encoder
• Endat encoder
Control mode
• Sensorless vector control
(SVC)
• Closed-loop vector control
(CLVC)
• Sensorless vector control
(SVC)
• Closed-loop vector control
(CLVC)
• V/F control
Commissioning via Android
cell phone (not providing
English version currently)
Not support Support
PG card for asynchronous
motor Not requiring PG card Requiring MCTC-PG-A2
Extension card MCTC-KZ-B MCTC-KZ-D
Use of optional part
The PG card and the
extension card use the same
interface on the MCB, and
they cannot be used at the
same time.
The PG card and the
extension card can be used
at the same time.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Introduction NICE1000new User Manual- 4 -
2. Connection to peripheral devices
Ground
AC input reactor
Electromagnetic
contactor
Molded case circuit
breaker (MCCB) or
earth leakage circuit
breaker (ELCB)
Three-phase AC
power supply
Braking resistor
Noise filter on
input side
To guarantee safety, use an
electromagnetic contactor. Do not
use it to start or stop the controller
because such operation reduces
the service life of the controller.
Select a proper breaker to
resist large in-rush current
that flows into the controller
at power-on.
Use within the allowable
power supply specification of
the controller.
Reliably ground the
motor and the
controller to prevent
electric shock.
Reduce the
electromagnetic
interference on
the input side.
P(+)
BR
Braking
unit
+
- Motor
MF.KRUN STOP
RES
QUICK
PRG ENTER
RUN LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC
RPM %
A InHz
External operation panel
Output
reactor
Ground
Ground
Operation box
Hall display
board
Bottom floor
Top floor
Hall display
board
2
4
5
7 8
6
3
1
Suppress the high order harmonic
to improve the power factor.
NICE1000 new
integrated elevator
controller
• For model selection of the peripheral electrical devices, refer to section 3.4.
• The NICE1000 new in the preceding figure is the standard model. For information about
other structures, refer to section 2.5.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Introduction- 5 -
3. Basic function list
Function Description Remarks
Common Running Functions
Integrated control
for synchronous
and asynchronous
motors
It can drive both AC asynchronous motor and
permanent magnetic synchronous motor (PMSM).
Switchover
between the
two types of
motors easily by
modifying F1-25
Full collective
selective
In automatic running or attendant state, this function
enables the elevator to respond both car calls and
hall calls. Passengers at any service floor can call the
elevator by pressing the up call button and down call
button.
Collective
selection set in
FE-00
Door open time
setting
The system automatically determines different door
open time for door open for call, command, protection,
or delay according to the set door open holding time.
Set in group Fb
Door open holding
In automatic running state, passengers can press
the door open button in the car to delay door open to
facilitate goods to be moved in or out.
Set in group Fb
Door machine
service floor setting
You can set the required service floors of the door
machines.
Set in Fb-02 and
Fb-04
Door pre-close
by the door close
button
During door open holding in automatic running state,
passengers can press the door close button to close
the door in advance, which improves the efficiency.
-
Floor number
display setting
The system supports display of floor numbers in
combinations of numbers and letters, which meets the
requirements of special conditions.
Set in group FE
Light curtain signal
judgment
If the door is blocked by stuff during door close, the
light curtain acts and the elevator opens the door. This
function is invalid in fire emergency state.
-
Independent control
of the front door
and back door
When there are two doors for a car, this function
implements independent and automatic control on the
two doors according to your requirements.
Refer to section
5.2.3 in Chapter 5
Repeat door close
If the door lock is not applied after the elevator
performs door close for a certain time, the elevator
automatically opens the door and then closes the door
repeatedly.
Fb-08 (Door close
protection time)
Auto-leveling
The systems implements automatic accurate leveling
based on the floor pulse counting and up/down leveling
feedback signals.
-
Response at
acceleration
The system allows the elevator to automatically
respond to calls from the service floors during
acceleration.
-
Idle elevator
returning to base
floor
In automatic running state, the elevator automatically
returns to the set parking floor and waits for
passengers if there is no car call or hall call within the
set time.
F9-00 (Idle time
before returning
to base floor)Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Introduction NICE1000new User Manual- 6 -
Landing at another
floor
If the door open time exceeds the door open protection
time but the door open limit signal is still inactive, the
elevator closes the door and then automatically runs to
the next landing floor. The system reports fault Err55.
-
Forced door close
When the door fails to close within the set time due
to the action of the light curtain or safety edge, the
elevator enters the forced door close state, closes the
door slowly, and gives a prompt tone.
-
Service floor setting You can enable or disable the system service for
certain floors flexibly based on actual requirements. Set in F6-05
Independent
running
The elevator does not respond to any call, and the
door needs to be closed manually. In the case of group
control, the elevator runs independently out of the
group control system.
Enabled when
Bit9 of FE-13 is 1
and independent
running input of
the MCB is active
Attendant running In attendant state, the running of the elevator is
controlled by the attendant. -
Low-speed self-
rescue
When the elevator is in non-inspection state and
stops at non-leveling area, the elevator automatically
runs to the leveling area at low speed if the safety
requirements are met, and then opens the door.
-
Door control
function
You can set whether the system keeps outputting
commands after door open limit and door close limit
based on the type of the door machine.
-
Car arrival gong After the elevator arrives at the destination floor, the
CTB gives a prompt tone. -
Automatic
startup torque
compensation
The system automatically implements startup torque
compensation based on the current car load, achieving
smooth startup and improving the riding comfort.
Set in F8-01
Direct travel ride
The system automatically calculates and generates
the running curves based on the distance, enabling the
elevator to directly stop at the leveling position without
creeping.
-
Automatic
generation of
optimum curve
The system automatically calculates the optimum
speed curve compliant with the human-machine
function principle based on the distance, without being
limited by the number of curves or short floor.
-
Service suspension
output
When the elevator cannot respond to hall calls, the
corresponding terminal outputs the service suspension
signal.
-
Running times
recording
In automatic running state, the system automatically
records the running times of the elevator.
Recorded in F9-
05 and F9-06
Running time
recording
The system automatically records the accumulative
power-on time, working hours, and working days of the
elevator.
Recorded in
F9-03Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Introduction- 7 -
Automatic door
open upon door
lock abnormality
If the system detects that the door lock circuit is
abnormal during door open/close, the elevator
automatically opens and closes the door again, and
reports a fault after the set door open/close times is
reached.
Fb-09 (Door open/
close protection
times)
Full-load direct
running
When the car is full-loaded in automatic running state,
the elevator does not respond to hall calls from the
passing floors. These halls calls, however, can still be
registered, and will be executed at next time of running
(in the case of single elevator) or by another elevator
(in the case of parallel control).
-
Overload protection When the car load exceeds the rated elevator load, the
elevator alarms and stops running. -
Fault data
recording
The system automatically records detailed information
of faults, which helps improve the efficiency of
maintenance and repair.
Set in group FC
Inspection-related Functions
Shaft auto-tuning
Shaft auto-tuning is required before first-time automatic
running. During shaft auto-tuning, the elevator runs
from the bottom floor to the top floor at the inspection
speed and automatically records all position signals in
the shaft.
Refer to section
5.1.2
User-defined
parameter display
You can view the parameters that are modified and
different from the default setting. Set in FP-02
Inspection running
After entering the inspection state, the system cancels
automatic running and related operations. You can
press the up or down call button to make the elevator
jog at the inspection speed.
-
Motor auto-tuning
With simple parameter setting, the system can obtain
the motor parameters no matter whether the motor is
with-load or without load.
Refer to section
5.1.1
Floor position
intelligent
correction
Every time the elevator runs to the terminal floor, the
system automatically checks and corrects the car
position information based on slow-down switch 1, and
eliminates over travel top terminal or bottom terminal
with use of the slow-down switches.
-
Dual-speed for
inspection
Considering inaccurate running control at high
inspection speed but long running time at low
inspection speed, the system provides the dual-
speed curve for inspection, which greatly improves the
efficiency at inspection.
-
Test running
The test running includes the fatigue test of a new
elevator, car call floor test, hall call test, and tests
such as hall call response forbidden, door open/close
forbidden, terminal floor limit switch shielded, and
overload signal shielded.
Set in F6-10Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Introduction NICE1000new User Manual- 8 -
Fire Emergency and Security Functions
Returning to
base floor at fire
emergency
After receiving a fire emergency signal, the elevator
does not respond to any call but directly runs to the fire
emergency floor and waits.
F6-03 (Fire
emergency floor)
Firefighter running
After the elevator enters the firefighter running mode,
door open/close is implemented by the jog operation
(optional) by using the door open and close buttons
rather than automatically. In addition, the elevator
responds to only car calls and only one call can be
registered once.
F6-68 (Fire
emergency
function selection)
Elevator lock
In automatic running state, when the elevator lock
switch acts or the set elevator time is reached, the
elevator cancels all registered calls, returns to the
elevator lock floor, stops running, and turns off the
lamp and fan in the car.
F6-04 (Elevator
lock floor)
Troubleshooting
based on fault level
Faults are classified into different levels based on the
severity. Different levels of faults are rectified using
different methods.
Refer to Chapter
8
Runaway
prevention
The system detects the running state of the elevator in
real time. If the elevator speed exceeds the limit, the
system immediately stops running of the elevator.
-
Automatic
identification of
power failure
The system automatically identifies power failure and
outputs the relay signal for emergency evacuation
automatic switchover to implement emergency
evacuation at power failure.
Y0 especially
used for
emergency
evacuation
switchover
Automatic running
mode switchover at
power failure
For the synchronous motor, when the power supply
is interrupted, the system can perform automatic
switchover between shorting stator braking mode and
controller drive mode, implementing quick and stable
self-rescue.
Shorting stator braking mode: Upon power failure,
UPS is used, the motor stator is shorted, and the brake
is automatically released, making the car move slowly
under the effect of the weighing difference between the
car and the counterweight.
F6-69
(Emergency
evacuation
function selection)
Running direction
identification at
power failure
When the power supply is interrupted, the system
can automatically identify the current car load and
determine the running direction.
F6-69
(Emergency
evacuation
function selection)
Base floor
verification
After detecting a position abnormality, the system runs
the elevator to each floor until reaching the terminal
floor for verification, guaranteeing system security.
-
Passenger
unloading first upon
fault
The system automatically determines the fault level. If
the safety running conditions are met, the elevator first
runs to the leveling position to unload passengers.
-
Interference degree
judgment
The system judges the degree of communication
interference. Viewed in FA-24Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Introduction- 9 -
Earthquake
protection
When the earthquake detection device acts and
inputs a signal to the system, the elevator lands at the
nearest floor and stops running. After the earthquake
signal becomes inactive and the fault is reset manually,
the elevator restores to normal running.
-
Independent
working power
supply
The NICE1000new system supports not only three-
phase 380 VAC but also single-phase 220 VAC to
meet different applications of the power supply system
(such as 220 V UPS)
-
Automatic voltage
identification
The system detects the bus voltage and automatically
adjusts the running speed of the elevator to adapt to
the situation of insufficient power from power supply
(such as emergency UPS).
-
Parallel Control and Other Functions
Parallel control The system supports parallel control of two elevators. Refer to 5.2.2
Dispersed waiting In parallel control, the elevators can wait at different
floors. Set in Fd-05
Parallel control exit
If the parallel control exit switch of a certain elevator in
a parallel control system is valid or the time for exiting
the parallel control is reached, the elevator exits
parallel control and runs independently. This does not
affect normal running of the parallel control system.
-
Parallel control
automatic exit
If an elevator in the parallel control system cannot
respond to calls in time due to faults, the elevator
automatically exits the parallel control system and runs
independently. This does not affect normal running of
the parallel control system.
-
Anti-nuisance
function
The system automatically judges the number of
passengers in the car and compares it with the number
of registered car calls. If there are excessive car calls,
the system determines that it is nuisance and cancels
all car calls. In this case, passengers need to register
correct car calls again.
F8-13 (Anti-
nuisance function)
Prompt of non-door
zone stop
The system gives a prompt when the elevator stops at
a non-door zone area due to faults. -
Interface for
intelligent
residential
management
The system provides an interface for intelligent
residential management to perform remote monitoring
on the state of elevators in the residential district.
Residential
monitoring board
MCTC-MIB
required
Parameter copy You can upload and download parameters by using
the operation panel MDKE6.
MDKE6 operation
panel required
Energy-Saving Functions
Car energy-saving
If there is no running command within the set time, the
system automatically cuts off the power supply to the
lamp and fan in the car.
F9-01 (Time for
fan and lamp to
be turned off)Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Introduction NICE1000new User Manual- 10 -
Energy-saving of
idle door machine
After the car lamp is turned off, the system does not
output the door close command, which reduces power
consumption of the door machine.
Set in FE-14
4. Optional function list
Function Description Remarks
Door pre-open
In automatic running state, when the elevator speed is
smaller than 0.2 m/s at normal stop and the door zone
signal is active, the system shorts the door lock by
means of the shorting door lock circuit contactor and
outputs the door open signal, implementing door pre-
open. This improves the elevator use efficiency.
Door pre-open
module MCTC-SCB
required
Micro-leveling
After landing at a floor, the elevator may move upward
or downward due to the load change and the car door
is not aligned with the ground, which is inconvenient for
in and out of passengers and goods. In this case, the
system allows the elevator to run to the leveling position
in the door open state at the leveling speed.
Door pre-open
module MCTC-SCB
required
Power failure
emergency
evacuation
For the elevator configured with UPS, the system uses
the UPS to implement low-speed self-rescue in the case
of power failure.
UPS required
Onsite
commissioning
The system can control and monitor running of elevators
by using the NEMS software.
NEMS software
required
Commissioning
by cell phone
The Android cell phone can be connected to the
controller through the external Bluetooth module, and
you can commission and monitor the elevator, and
upload and download parameters by using the cell
phone.
The software does not not supporting English version
currently.
Special Bluetooth
module (MCTC-
BTM-A) and cell
phone host EDSAP
required
Residential
monitoring
The control system can be connected to the terminal in
the monitoring room. By using the NEMS software, you
can view the floor position, running direction, and fault
state of the elevator.
NEMS, accessories,
and residential
monitoring board
MCTC-MIB requiredDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Contents
Preface ................................................................................................................. 1
Introduction ........................................................................................................... 3
Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions................................................... 14
1.1 Safety Precautions ....................................................................................................... 14
1.2 General Precautions ..................................................................................................... 17
1.3 Protective Functions ..................................................................................................... 20
Chapter 2 Product Information ........................................................................... 22
2.1 System Configuration of the NICE1000new ........................................................................................................................ 22
2.2 Designation Rules and Model Description.................................................................... 23
2.3 Models and Specifications ............................................................................................ 23
2.4 Technical Specifications ............................................................................................... 24
2.5 Physical Appearance and Mounting Dimensions ......................................................... 26
2.6 Optional Parts ............................................................................................................... 28
2.7 Selection of Braking Components ................................................................................ 29
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation ................................................ 34
3.1 Installation Requirements ............................................................................................. 34
3.2 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................................. 35
3.3 Electrical Installation ..................................................................................................... 36
3.4 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices .................................................................... 44
3.5 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the NICE1000 new Control System .................................... 46
3.6 Installation of Shaft Position Signals ............................................................................ 46
Chapter 4 Use of the Commissioning Tools ....................................................... 52
4.1 Use of the LED Operation Panel .................................................................................. 52
Chapter 5 System Commissioning and Application Example ............................. 58
5.1 System Commissioning ................................................................................................ 58
5.2 System Application ....................................................................................................... 70
Chapter 6 Function Code Table .......................................................................... 80
6.1 Function Code Description ........................................................................................... 80
6.2 Function Code Groups ................................................................................................. 80
6.3 Function Code Table..................................................................................................... 81Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 7 Description of Function Codes......................................................... 108
Group F0: Basic Parameters ............................................................................................ 108
Group F1: Motor Parameter ..............................................................................................110
Group F2: Vector Control Parameters ...............................................................................113
Group F3: Running Control Parameters ............................................................................116
Group F4: Floor Parameters..............................................................................................118
Group F5: Input Terminal Parameters .............................................................................. 120
Group F6: Basic Elevator Parameters .............................................................................. 130
Group F7: Output Terminal Parameters ........................................................................... 143
Group F8: Enhanced Function Parameters ...................................................................... 145
Group F9: Time Parameters ............................................................................................. 147
Group FA: Keypad Setting Parameters ............................................................................ 148
Group Fb: Door Function Parameters .............................................................................. 159
Group FC: Protection Function Parameters ..................................................................... 162
Group Fd: Communication Parameters ............................................................................ 165
Group FE: Elevator Function Parameters ........................................................................ 166
Group Fr: Leveling Adjustment Parameters ..................................................................... 170
Group FF: Factory Parameters......................................................................................... 171
Group FP: User Parameters ............................................................................................. 171
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 174
8.1 Maintenance ............................................................................................................... 174
8.2 Description of Fault Levels ......................................................................................... 175
8.3 Fault Information and Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 177
Chapter 9 EMC ................................................................................................. 192
9.1 Definition of Terms ...................................................................................................... 192
9.2 Introduction to EMC Standard .................................................................................... 192
9.3 Selection of Peripheral EMC Devices......................................................................... 193
9.4 Shielded Cable ........................................................................................................... 196
9.5 Solutions to Common EMC Interference Problems .................................................... 198Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
Safety Information and PrecautionsDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Safety Information and Precautions NICE1000new User Manual- 14 -
Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions
In this manual, the notices are graded based on the degree of danger:
• DANGER indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in severe
personal injury or even death.
• WARNING indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in potential risk
of severe personal injury or even death.
• CAUTION indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in minor or
moderate personal injury or equipment damage.
In addition, NOTE appearing in other chapters indicates that an unintended result or
situation may occur if the notice is not complied with.
The notices in this manual you have to observe are aimed at guaranteeing your personal
safety, as well as to prevent damage to the controller or the parts connected to it. Read this
chapter carefully so that you have a thorough understanding and perform all operations by
following the notices in this chapter. Monarch will assume no liability or responsibility for any
injury or loss caused by improper operation.
1.1 Safety Precautions
Use Stage Safety
Grade Precautions
Before
installation WARNING
• This controller has hazardous high voltage and the controlled
motor is a dangerous rotating device. Failure to comply with
the notices may result in personal injury or damage to the
property.
• Transportation, installation, operation and maintenance of
the controller can be performed only by qualified personnel
after they get familiar with the safety information in this
manual. This is the prerequisite of safe and stable running of
the equipment.
• Do not open the front cover or touch the power terminals
on the main circuit within 10 minutes after the controller is
powered off. The capacitor on the DC circuit still has residual
high voltage even after power-off. Failure to comply will
result in electric shock.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000new User Manual Safety Information and Precautions- 15 -
Use Stage Safety
Grade Precautions
During
installation
DANGER
• Do not install the equipment if you find water seepage,
component missing or damage upon unpacking.
• Do not install the equipment if the packing list does not
conform to the product you received.
• Install the equipment on incombustible objects such as
metal, and keep it away from combustible materials. Failure
to comply may result in a fire.
WARNING
• Do not loosen the fixed screws of the components, especially
the screws with red mark.
• Do not install the controller on vibrating parts. Failure
to comply may result in damage to the equipment or
unexpected accidents.
CAUTION
• Handle the equipment with care during transportation to
prevent damage to the equipment.
• Do not drop wire end or screw into the controller. Failure to
comply will result in damage to the controller.
• Do not use the equipment with damaged or missing
components. Failure to comply will result in personal injury.
• Do not touch the components with your hands. Failure to
comply will result in static electricity damage.
• Install the controller in places free of vibration and direct
sunlight.
At wiring
DANGER
• Wiring must be performed only by qualified personnel under
instructions described in this manual. Failure to comply may
result in unexpected accidents.
• A circuit breaker must be used to isolate the power supply
and the controller. Failure to comply may result in a fire.
• Ensure that the power supply is cut off before wiring. Failure
to comply may result in electric shock.
• Tie the controller to ground properly according to the
standard. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
WARNING
• Never connect the power cables to the output terminals (U,
V, W) of the controller. Pay attention to the marks of the
wiring terminals and ensure correct wiring. Failure to comply
will result in damage to the controller.
• Never connect the braking resistor between the DC bus
terminals (+) and (-). Failure to comply may result in a fire.
CAUTION
• Ensure that the cabling satisfies the EMC requirements and
local codes. Use wire sizes recommended in the manual.
Failure to comply may result in accidents.
• Use the shielded cable for the encoder, and ensure that the
shield is reliably grounded at one end.
• Use a twisted cable with twisted distance of 20−30 mm
as the communication cable, and ensure that the shield is
reliably grounded.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Safety Information and Precautions NICE1000new User Manual- 16 -
Use Stage Safety
Grade Precautions
During
running
DANGER
• All peripheral devices must be connected properly according
to the circuit wiring instructions provided in this manual.
Failure to comply will result in accidents
• Cover the controller properly before power-on to prevent
electric shock.
• Do not open the controller’s cover after power-on. Failure to
comply may result in electric shock.
• Do not touch the controller and peripheral circuits with wet
hand. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
• Do not touch any I/O terminal of the controller. Failure to
comply may result in electric shock.
• The controller performs safety detection on external strong
power circuits automatically at the beginning of power-on.
Do not touch the U, V, W terminals of the controller or the
motor terminals at the moment. Failure to comply may result
in electric shock.
• Do not touch the fan or the discharging resistor to check the
temperature. Failure to comply will result in personal burnt.
• Signal detection must be performed only by qualified
personnel during operation. Failure to comply will result in
personal injury or damage to the controller.
WARNING
• Do not touch the rotating part of the motor during the motor
auto-tuning or running. Failure to comply will result in
accidents.
• Check that the following requirements are met:
• The voltage class of the power supply is consistent with the
rated voltage class of the controller.
• The input terminals (R, S, T) and output terminals (U, V, W)
are properly connected.
• No short-circuit exists in the peripheral circuit.
• The wiring is secured.
Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller.
CAUTION
• For synchronous motor, ensure that motor auto-tuning is
performed successfully. Perform trial running before resuming
the steel rope so as to make the motor run properly.
• Avoid objects falling into the controller when it is running.
Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller.
• Do not perform the voltage resistance test on any part of the
controller because such test has been done in the factory.
Failure to comply may result in accidents.
• Do not change the default settings of the controller. Failure
to comply will result in damage to the controller.
• Do not start/stop the controller by turning on or off the
contactor. Failure to comply will result in damage to the
controller.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000new User Manual Safety Information and Precautions- 17 -
Use Stage Safety
Grade Precautions
During
maintenance
DANGER
• Do not repair or maintain the controller at power-on. Failure
to comply will result in electric shock.
• Repair or maintain the controller when its voltage is lower
than 36 VAC, about 10 minutes after the controller is
powered off. Otherwise, the residual voltage in the capacitor
may result in personal injury.
• Do not allow unqualified personnel to repair or maintain the
controller. Failure to comply will result in personal injury or
damage to the controller.
WARNING
• Repair or maintenance of the controller can be performed
only by the warranty center or qualified personnel authorized
by Monarch. Failure to comply will result in personal injury or
damage to the controller.
• Power supply must be cut off before repair or maintenance
of the controller.
CAUTION
• Set the parameters again after the controller is replaced. All
the pluggable components must be plugged or removed only
after power-off.
• Strictly obey the laws and regulations and repair and
maintain the elevator equipment periodically. Only timely
troubleshooting can ensure the safety of passengers.
Disposal
CAUTION
The packaging materials, screws and terminal blocks can be
re-used and it is suggested that you keep them well for future
use.
WARNING
The electrolytic capacitors on the main circuits and PCB may
explode when they are burnt. Poisonous gas is generated when
the plastic parts are burnt. Treat them as ordinary industrial
waste.
1.2 General Precautions
1. Requirement on the residual current device (RCD)
The controller generates high leakage current during running, which flows through the
protective earthing conductor. Thus install a type- B RCD at primary side of the power
supply. When selecting the RCD, you should consider the transient and steady-state leakage
current to ground that may be generated at startup and during running of the controller. You
can select a specialized RCD with the function of suppressing high harmonics or a general-
purpose RCD with relatively large residual current.
2. High leakage current warning
The controller generates high leakage current during running, which flows through the
protective earthing conductor. Earth connection must be done before connection of power
supply. Earthing shall comply with local regulations and related IEC standards.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Safety Information and Precautions NICE1000new User Manual- 18 -
3. Motor insulation test
Perform the insulation test when the motor is used for the first time, or when it is reused
after being stored for a long time, or in a regular check-up, in order to prevent the poor
insulation of motor windings from damaging the controller. The motor must be disconnected
from the controller during the insulation test. A 500-V mega-Ohm meter is recommended for
the test. Ensure that the insulation resistance is not less than 5 MΩ.
U V W
Megger
Motor input
terminals
Ground
4. Thermal protection of motor
If the rated capacity of the motor selected does not match that of the controller, especially
when the rated power of the controller is greater than that of the motor, adjust the motor
protection parameters on the operation panel of the controller or install a thermal relay for
the motor circuit for protection.
5. Motor heat and noise
The output of the controller is pulse width modulation (PWM) wave with certain harmonic
wave, and therefore, the motor temperature rise, noise, and vibration are slightly greater
than those at running with the mains frequency.
6. Voltage-sensitive device or capacitor on the output side of the controller
The controller outputs PWM waves, and therefore, do not install the capacitor for improving
power factor or lightning protection voltage-sensitive resistor on the output side of the
controller. Otherwise, the controller may suffer transient overcurrent or even be damaged.
M
U V W
Capacitor or varistor
Controller
7. Contactor on the input and output sides of the controller
When a contactor is installed between the input side of the controller and the power supply,
the controller must not be started or stopped by turning on or off the contactor.
If the controller has to be operated by the contactor, ensure that the time interval between
switching is at least one hour because frequent charge and discharge will shorten theDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000new User Manual Safety Information and Precautions- 19 -
service life of the capacitor inside the controller.
When a contactor is installed between the output side of the controller and the motor, do not
turn off the contactor when the controller is active. Otherwise, modules inside the controller
may be damaged.
380 VAC
50/60 Hz
R
S
T
V
W
U
Contactor KM Contactor KM or
other switches
M
Controller
8. Use outside the rated voltage
The controller must not be used outside the allowable voltage range specified in this
manual. Otherwise, components inside the controller may be damaged. If required, use a
corresponding voltage step-up or step-down device.
9. Surge suppressor
The controller has a built-in voltage dependent resistor (VDR) for suppressing the surge
voltage generated when the inductive loads (electromagnetic contactor, electromagnetic
relay, solenoid valve, electromagnetic coil and electromagnetic brake) around the controller
are switched on or off. If the inductive loads generate very high surge voltage, use a surge
suppressor for the inductive load or use a surge suppressor together with a diode.
Note
Do not connect the surge suppressor on the output side of the controller.
10. Altitude and de-rating
In places where the altitude is above 1000 m and the cooling effect reduces due to thin air, it
is necessary to de-rate the controller. Contact Monarch for technical support.
11. Disposal
The electrolytic capacitors on the main circuits and PCB may explode when they are
burnt. Poisonous gas is generated when the plastic parts are burnt. Treat them as ordinary
industrial waste.
12. Adaptable motor
The controller is adaptable to squirrel-cage asynchronous motor or AC PMSM. Select a
proper controller according to motor nameplate.
The default parameters configured inside the controller are squirrel-cage asynchronous
motor parameters. It is still necessary to perform motor auto-tuning or modify the default
values based on actual conditions. Otherwise, the running effect and protection performance
will be affected. For PMSM, motor auto-tuning must be performed.
13. Precautions on selecting residual-current circuit breaker (RCCB)
Tripping may be caused if an improper RCCB is selected when the controller drives the
motor. This is because the output wave of the controller has high harmonics and the motorDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Safety Information and Precautions NICE1000new User Manual- 20 -
cable and the cable connecting the controller and the motor produce leakage current, which
is much larger than the current when the motor runs at the mains frequency.
Thus, it is necessary to determine the proper RCCB sensitivity based on the general
leakage current of the cables and the motor. The leakage current is dependent on the motor
capacity, cable length, insulation class and wiring method. Generally, the leakage current
on the output side of the controller is three times of the current when the motor runs at the
mains frequency.
1.3 Protective Functions
Adopting different protective functions for different levels of faults, the NICE1000 new provides
the elevator running system with full abnormality protection. For detailed solutions to the
faults, see chapter 8.
Faults of the controller are classified as follows:
1. Speed abnormal
The controller monitors the encoder feedback speed and output torque. Once the
feedback speed exceeds the limit or the deviation between the torque limit and the speed
feedback is too large, the controller performs protection immediately, reports an alarm
and prohibits running.
2. Drive control abnormal
The related faults include drive overcurrent, overvoltage/undervoltage, power input/
output phase loss, overload, and storage abnormality. If such a fault occurs, the controller
performs protection immediately, stops output, applies the brake and prohibits running.
3. Encoder abnormal
The related faults include encoder phase loss, direction reversing, wire-breaking, and
pulse interference. If such a fault occurs, the controller performs protection immediately to
avoid unexpected accidents. If pulse interference is large, the controller reports an alarm
immediately. If pulse interference is small, the controller performs position correction
every time it receives a leveling signal and clears the accumulative error.
4. Leveling sensor abnormal
The related faults include sensor failure or sensor stuck. The controller judges whether a
fault occurs based on the leveling signal change. If the leveling signal does not change
within the set time, the system reports an alarm.
5. Floor data abnormal
The system stores the floor information through the shaft auto-tuning. If the floor data is
abnormal, the system prompts the fault information at the first-time running. During actual
running, the controller continuously compares position information input by DIs with the
stored floor data. If the deviation is large, the system reports an alarm.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2
Product InformationDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Product Information NICE1000new User Manual- 22 -
Chapter 2 Product Information
2.1 System Configuration of the NICE1000new
The NICE1000 new series integrated elevator control system combines the functions of both
elevator controller and high-performance vector control AC drive. As a high-performance
vector drive and control elevator system, it meets the standard applications of the elevator.
Users can also configure the optional door pre-open module and remote monitoring system
to meet requirements for more intelligent applications.
The following figure shows the system components.
Figure 2-1 System components of the NICE1000 new
Operation
box
LED operation
panel (MDKE)
Hall display board
Host
computer
NICE1000 new integrated controller
Door machine
controller
Load cell
MF.KRUN STOP
RES
QUICK
PRG ENTER
RUN LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC
RPM %
A VHz
Synchronous or asynchronous motorDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Product Information- 23 -
2.2 Designation Rules and Model Description
2.2.1 Designation Rules and Nameplate
Figure 2-2 Designation rules and nameplate of the NICE1000 new
Nameplate
Controller model
Rated input
Rated output
Manufacturing SN
NICE–L–H–40 15
NICE series integrated
elevator controller
H 1000 new
Mark Motor Type
L
Mark Controller Type
Specialized for
elevators
20 Single-phase/
Three-phase 220 V
Mark Voltage Class
40 Three-phase 380 V
02 2.2 kW
Mark
03 3.7 kW
... ...
Power Class
30 30 kW
45 45 kW
Nameplate
position
MODEL: NICE-L-H-4015
INPUT: 3PH AC 380~440V 36A 50/60Hz
OUTPUT: 3PH AC 0~440V 33A 0~90Hz 15KW
Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co.Ltd
S/N: 010150602803825403
NICE1000 new
Integrated elevator
controller
2.3 Models and Specifications
Table 2-1 NICE1000 new models and specifications
Controller Model Power Capacity
(kVA)
Input Current
(A)
Output Current
(A)
Motor Power
(kW)
Single-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-L-H-2002 2.0 9.2 5.2 1.1
NICE-L-H-2003 2.9 13.3 7.5 1.5
220-NICE-L-H-4007 3.9 17.9 10.3 2.2
220-NICE-L-H-4011 5.9 25.3 15.5 3.7
220-NICE-L-H-4015 7.3 31.3 19 4.0
220-NICE-L-H-4018 8.6 34.6 22.5 5.5
220-NICE-L-H-4022 10.6 42.6 27.7 11
220-NICE-L-H-4030 13.1 52.6 34.6 15
Three-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-L-H-2002 4.0 11.0 9.6 2.2
NICE-L-H-2003 5.9 17.0 14.0 3.7
220-NICE-L-H-4007 7.0 20.5 18.0 4.0Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Product Information NICE1000new User Manual- 24 -
Controller Model Power Capacity
(kVA)
Input Current
(A)
Output Current
(A)
Motor Power
(kW)
220-NICE-L-H-4011 10.0 29.0 27.0 5.5
220-NICE-L-H-4015 12.6 36.0 33.0 7.5
220-NICE-L-H-4018 15.0 41.0 39.0 11.0
220-NICE-L-H-4022 18.3 49.0 48.0 15.0
220-NICE-L-H-4030 23.0 62.0 60.0 18.5
Three-phase 380 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-L-H-4002 4.0 6.5 5.1 2.2
NICE-L-H-4003 5.9 10.5 9.0 3.7
NICE-L-H-4005 8.9 14.8 13.0 5.5
NICE-L-H-4007 11.0 20.5 18.0 7.5
NICE-L-H-4011 17.0 29.0 27.0 11.0
NICE-L-H-4015 21.0 36.0 33.0 15.0
NICE-L-H-4018 24.0 41.0 39.0 18.5
NICE-L-H-4022 30.0 49.5 48.0 22.0
NICE-L-H-4030 40.0 62.0 60.0 30.0
NICE-L-H-4037 57.0 77.0 75.0 37.0
NICE-L-H-4045 69.0 93.0 91.0 45.0
NICE-L-H-4055 85.0 113.0 112.0 55.0
Note
1. In terms of single-phase and three-phase 220 VAC, NICE-L-C-2002 and NICE-L-C-2003 are
specially designed for 220 VAC. The other models that are marked by prefixing "220-" are modified
from the three-phase 380 VAC models.
2. Same models are available for single-phase 220 VAC and three-phase 220 VAC. Pay attentions
to the power rating of the adaptable motor during the use.
3. Select the proper controller output current based on the rated motor current. Ensure that the
controller output current is equal to or greater than the rated motor current.
4. If you require higher voltage or power rating, contact Monarch.
2.4 Technical Specifications
Table 2-2 Technical specifications of the NICE1000new
Item Specification
Basic
specifications
Maximum
frequency 99 Hz
Carrier frequency 2–16 kHz, adjusted automatically based on the load
featuresDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Product Information- 25 -
Item Specification
Basic
specifications
Motor control mode
Sensorless vector control (SVC)
Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
Startup torque 0.5 Hz: 180% (SVC)
0 Hz: 200% (CLVC)
Speed adjustment
range
1:100 (SVC)
1:1000 (CLVC)
1:50 (V/F)
Speed stability
accuracy
±0.5% (SVC)
±0.05% (CLVC)
Torque control
accuracy ±5% (CLVC)
Overload 60s for 150% of the rated current, 1s for 200% of the rated
current
Motor auto-tuning With-load auto-tuning; no-load auto-tuning
Distance control Direct travel ride mode in which the leveling position can
be adjusted flexibly
Acceleration/
Deceleration curve N curves generated automatically
Slow-down New reliable slow-down function, automatically identifying
the position of the slow-down shelf
Shaft auto-tuning 32-bit data, recording the position in the shaft accurately
Leveling
adjustment Flexible and easy leveling adjustment function
Startup torque
compensation
Load cell startup pre-torque compensation
No-load-cell startup pre-torque self-adaption
Test function Easy to implement multiple elevators commissioning
functions.
Fault protection Solutions to different levels of elevator faults
Intelligent
management
Remote monitoring, user management, and group control
adjustment
Security check of
peripheral devices
after power-on
Security check of peripheral devices, such as grounding
and short circuit, after power-on
Status monitor Monitoring the state of feedback signals to ensure that the
elevator works properlyDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Product Information NICE1000new User Manual- 26 -
Item Specification
I/O feature
Digital input (DI)
24 x DI
Input specification: 24 V, 5 mA
3 higher-voltage detection input terminals of safety circuit
and door lock circuit
Input specification: 95−125 V
Floor input/output 50 floor button inputs/outputs; functions set flexibly
Analog input (AI) AI (voltage range: –10 V to +10 V)
Communication
port
1 CANbus communication ports
1 Modbus communication port
Output terminal
block
27 relay outputs
The terminals can be allocated with different functions.
Encoder interface Supporting different encoders by using an optional PG
card
Operation and
display
Keypad Used for shaft auto-tuning
LED operation
panel
5-digit LED display, querying/modifying most parameters
and monitoring the system state
NEMS software Connecting the control system and the host computer,
convenient for querying/motoring the system state.
Environment
Altitude Below 1000 m (de-rated 1% for each 100 m higher)
Ambient
temperature
–10°C to 50°C (de-rated if the ambient temperature is
above 40°C)
Humidity Maximum relative humidity 95%, non-condensing
Vibration Maximum vibration: 5.9 m/s2 (0.6 g)
Storage
temperature -20°C to 60°C
IP level IP20
Pollution degree PD2
Power distribution
system TN, TT
2.5 Physical Appearance and Mounting Dimensions
The following figures show the physical appearance and mounting dimensions of the three
different structures of the NICE1000 new
.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Product Information- 27 -
Figure 2-3 Physical appearance and mounting dimensions of the NICE1000 new
1. L structure, 2.2–15 kW
A
B
W
H
D
Φ
2. L structure, 18–22 KW, 30 –37 KW
A
B
W
H
D
Φ
3. L structure, 45–55 kW
DA
Φ
B H
WDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Product Information NICE1000new User Manual- 28 -
The following table lists the mounting dimensions of different models.
Table 2-3 Mounting dimensions of the NICE1000 new
Controller Model A
(mm)
B
(mm)
H
(mm) W (mm) D
(mm)
Hole
Diameter
(mm)
Gross
Weight
(kg)
Single-phase/Three-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-L-H-2002 150 334.5 347 223 143 6.5 5.5
NICE-L-H-2003
220-NICE-L-H-4007
150 334.5 347 223 173.5 6.5 7220-NICE-L-H-4011
220-NICE-L-H-4015
220-NICE-L-H-4018 195 335 350 210 192 6 9.1
220-NICE-L-H-4022
220-NICE-L-H-4030 230 380 400 250 220 7 17
Three-phase 380 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-L-H-4002
150 334.5 347 223 143 6.5 5.5NICE-L-H-4003
NICE-L-H-4005
NICE-L -H-4007
150 334.5 347 223 173.5 6.5 7NICE-L -H-4011
NICE-L -H-4015
NICE-L-H-4018 195 335 350 210 192 6 9.1
NICE-L-H-4022
NICE-L-H-4030 230 380 400 250 220 7 17
NICE-L-H-4037
NICE-L-H-4045 260 580 600 385 265 10 32
NICE-L-H-4055
2.6 Optional Parts
If any optional part in the following table is required, specify it in your order.
Table 2-4 Optional parts of the NICE1000 new
Name Model Function Remark
External
braking unit MDBUN It is provided for the NICE1000new of
37 kW and above.
For details, see section
2.7 "Selection of Braking
Components".
Energy
feedback
unit
MCTC-
AFE
It is used for energy saving. This unit
feeds back the electricity generated
during braking to the grid.
-Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Product Information- 29 -
Name Model Function Remark
PG card
MCTC-
PG-A2
It is used to adapt to the push-pull and
open-collector incremental encoders. -
MCTC-
PG-D
It is used to adapt to the UVW
differential encoder and applied to
synchronous motor.
It requires 5 V power supply.
-
MCTC-
PG-E
It is used to adapt to the SIN/COS
encoder. -
MCTC-
PG-F1
It is used to adapt to the absolute
encoder (Heidenhain ECN413/1313)
External LED
operation panel MDKE It is the external LED display and
operation panel.
It provides the RJ45
interface for connecting to
the controller.
External LED
operation panel MDKE6 It is the external LED display and
operation panel.
It can be used for copying
parameters.
Extension cable MDCAB It is a standard 8-core network cable
and can be connected to MDKE.
The cable length is 3 m in
the standard configuration.
2.7 Selection of Braking Components
The NICE1000 new models of 30 kW and below have a built-in braking unit, and you only need
to connect an external braking resistor between PB and + terminals. For models above 30
kW, you need to install a braking unit and a braking resistor externally.
The following figure shows the appearance and dimensions of the braking unit.
Figure 2-4 Appearance and dimensions of braking unit
φ5
110
60
236 247
224
165
Unit: mm
Select the braking resistor based on the configuration listed in the following table.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Product Information NICE1000new User Manual- 30 -
Table 2-5 Braking resistor selection for the NICE1000 new models
Controller Model
Power of
Adaptable
Motor (kW)
Max.
Resistance
(Ω)
Min.
Resistance
(Ω)
Power of
Braking
Resistor (W)
Braking Unit
Single-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-L-H-2002 1.1 145.0 125.0 300
Built-in
NICE-L-H-2003 1.5 105.0 90.0 450
220-NICE-L-H-4007 2.2 72.0 63.0 600
220-NICE-L-H-4011 3.7 43.0 37.0 1100
220-NICE-L-H-4015 4.0 40.0 35.0 1200
220-NICE-L-H-4018 5.5 29.0 25.0 1600
220-NICE-L-H-4022 11.0 18.0 16.0 3500 Built-in
220-NICE-L-H-4030 15.0 13.0 13.0 4500
Three-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-L-H-2002 2.2 72.0 65.0 600
Built-in
NICE-L-H-2003 3.7 54.0 50.0 1100
220-NICE-L-H-4007 4.0 40.0 35.0 1200
220-NICE-L-H-4011 5.5 29.0 25.0 1600
220-NICE-L-H-4015 7.5 26.0 22.0 2500
220-NICE-L-H-4018 11.0 14.5 13.0 3500
220-NICE-L-H-4022 15.0 13.0 12.5 4500
220-NICE-L-H-4030 18.5 12.5 12.0 5500
Three-phase 380 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-L-H-4002 2.2 290 230 600
Built-in
NICE-L-H-4003 3.7 170 135 1100
NICE-L-H-4005 5.5 115 90 1600
NICE-L-H-4007 7.5 85 65 2500
NICE-L-H-4011 11 55 43 3500
NICE-L-H-4015 15 43 35 4500
NICE-L-H-4018 18.5 34.0 25 5500
NICE-L-H-4022 22 24 22 6500
NICE-L-H-4030 30 20 16 9000
NICE-L-H-4037 37 16.0 13 11000 MDBUN-60-T
NICE-L-H-4045 45 14.0 11 13500 MDBUN-60-T
NICE-L-H-4055 55 12.0 10 16500 MDBUN-90-TDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Product Information- 31 -
Note
1. The preceding configuration takes the synchronous motor as an example. The asynchronous
motor has poor energy transfer efficiency, and you can reduce the power of the braking resistor or
increase the resistance of the braking resistor.
2. It is recommended that you select the braking resistor closest to the minimum resistance.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Product Information NICE1000new User Manual- 32 -Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3
Mechanical and Electrical InstallationDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE1000new User Manual- 34 -
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation
3.1 Installation Requirements
3.1.1 Installation Environment Requirements
Item Requirements
Ambient temperature -10°C to 50°C
Heat dissipation
Install the controller on the surface of an incombustible object, and
ensure that there is sufficient space around for heat dissipation.
Install the controller vertically on the support using screws.
Mounting location
Free from direct sunlight, high humidity and condensation
Free from corrosive, explosive and combustible gas
Free from oil dirt, dust and metal powder
Vibration Less than 0.6 g
Protective enclosure
The controllers of plastic housing are whole-unit built-in products
operated through remote control and need to be installed in the final
system. The final system must have the required fireproof cover,
electrical protective cover and mechanical protective cover, and satisfy
the regional laws & regulations and related IEC requirements.
3.1.2 Installation Clearance Requirements
The clearance that needs to be reserved varies with the power class of the NICE1000 new
, as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-1 Clearance around the NICE1000 new for installation
B
B
AA
Hot air
Cold air
1.1-18.5 kW A ≥ 10 mm B ≥ 100 mm
22-45 kW A ≥ 50 mm B ≥ 100 mm
Installation clearance requirements
on the NICE1000 new of different
power classes
Power Class Clearance Requirements
The controller should be
installed vertically upward.
NICE1000 newDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation- 35 -
3.2 Mechanical Installation
The NICE1000 new is installed vertically upward on the support with screws fixed into the four
mounting holes, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-2 Diagram of mounting holes
4-M5x15 bolt
4-M5x15 screw
4-M5x15 washer
Fixing
backplane
NICE1000 new
integrated
elevator
controller
4-M6x15 bolt
4-M6x15 screw
4-M6x15 washer
1.1 kW ≤ P ≤ 15 kW
18.5 kW ≤ P ≤ 45 kW
2.5 Nm
With fixing
washer
Tightening
torque
3.5 Nm
With fixing
washer
Fastener
The controller is generally installed in the control cabinet of the elevator equipment room.
Pay attention to the following points when designing the control cabinet:
1. The temperature inside the cabinet must not rise to 10°C higher than the temperature
outside the cabinet.
2. A closed control cabinet must be configured with a fan (or other air cooling device such
as air conditioner) to ensure air circulation.
3. The air from the fan must not blow directly to the drive unit because this easily causes
dust adhesion and further a fault on the drive unit.
4. A vent must be available at bottom of the control cabinet to form bottom-up air flow,
which prevents heat island effect on the surface of components or partial thermal
conductivity effect.
5. If the fan does not meet the cooling requirements, install an air conditioner in the cabinet
or in the equipment room. Note that the temperature inside the cabinet must not be too
low; otherwise, condensation may occur, causing short-circuit of components.
6. For special environment where the temperature is high but cannot be reduced
effectively, de-rate the controller during use.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE1000new User Manual- 36 -
3.3 Electrical Installation
3.3.1 Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Description
■ Terminal Arrangement
The following figure shows terminal arrangement of the NICE1000new
.
Figure 3-3 Terminal arrangement of the NICE1000 new
CN4
CN12S1
J9 J10
ER
OK
CAN
Reserved
CN1
CN6
CN3CN8CN7 CN9
MCTC-MCB-H
J12
CN5 CN2
CN10
■ Description of Main Circuit Terminals
The following figure shows main circuit terminal arrangement.
Figure 3-4 Main circuit terminal arrangement
R S T PB U V W
POWER MOTORDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation- 37 -
Figure 3-5 Wiring of the main circuit
R S T PB IN In IN
POWER MOTOR
Three-phase AC
power supply
Safety contactor
Braking resistor
(For models of below 37 kW)
Braking unit
R S T PB IN In IN
POWER MOTOR
Three-phase AC
power supply
Safety contactor
Braking resistor
MDBUN
Jumper bar
(For models of 37 kW and above)
Table 3-1 Description of main circuit terminals
Terminal Name Description
R, S, T Three-phase power input
terminals Provide three-phase power supply.
(+), (-) Positive and negative
terminals of DC bus
Connect the external braking unit and energy feedback
unit for models of 37 kW and above.
(+), PB (P) Terminals for connecting
braking resistor
(+), PB: Connect the braking resistor for models of
below 37 kW.
(+), (P): Connect the DC reactor for models of 37 kW
and above.
At delivery, the (+) and P terminals are shorted with the
jumper bar. If you need not connect the DC reactor, do
not remove the jumper bar.
U, V, W Controller output
terminals Connect the three-phase motor.
Grounding terminal Must be grounded.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE1000new User Manual- 38 -
■ Description of Control Circuit Terminals
Table 3-2 Description of control circuit terminals
Mark Code Terminal Name Function Description Terminal Arrangement
CN2
CN4
24V/COM External 24 VDC
power supply
24 VDC power supply for
the entire board
CN4
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
L9
L10
L11
L12
L13
L14
WITH
24V
L17
L18
L19
L20
L21
L22
L23
L24
L25
CN 2
L15
L16
L26
L1 to L26 Button function
selection
Button input and button
indicator output, 24 V power
for button illumination
CN1
CN6
24V/COM External 24 VDC
power supply
24 VDC power supply for
the entire board
CN1
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
WITH
24V
X17
X18
X19
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
AI-M
CN 6
X15
X16
AI
X1 to X24 FROM
Input voltage range: 10–30
VDC
Input impedance: 4.7 kΩ
Optocoupler isolation
Input current limit: 5 mA
Functions set in F5-01 to
F5-24
AI-M/AI AI Used for the analog load cell
device
CN7
X25 to X27/
XCM
Higher-voltage
detection
terminal
Input voltage range: 110
VAC±15%
110 VDC±20% for safety
circuit and door lock circuit,
function set in F5-25 to
F5-27
Y1
M1
Y2
M2
Y3
M3
Y0
M0
CN7
XCM
X25
X26
X27Y0/M0 to
Y3/M3 Relay output
Normally-open (NO),
maximum current and
voltage rating: 5 A, 250 VAC
Function set in F7-00 to
F7-03
CN8
CN9
Y6 to Y22 Relay output
NO, maximum current and
voltage rating: 5 A, 250 VAC
or 5 A, 30 DC
Function set in F7-06 to
F7-22
Y6
Y7
Y8
Y9
YM1
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
Y14
CN8
Y15
Y16
YM2
Y17
Y18
Y19
Y20
Y21
Y22
YM3
CN9
YM1 to
YM3
COM for relay
output
YM1 is COM for Y6 to Y9;
YM2 is COM for Y10 to Y16;
YM3 is COM for Y17 to Y22.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation- 39 -
Mark Code Terminal Name Function Description Terminal Arrangement
CN3
MOD+/- Reserved -
GND
MOD+
AGAINST-
CAN+
CAN-
CN3
GND
CAN+/- CANbus
differential signal
CANbus communication
interface, used for parallel
control
GND Ground Must be grounded
CN5 Interface for extension board MCTC-KZ-D CN5
CN10 USB
interface Communication
• Used to connect the
external Bluetooth module
for commissioning via
Android cell phone
(not supporting English
version currently)
• Used to burn the MCB
program
• Used for residential
monitoring
CN10
CN12 RJ45
interface
Interface for
operation panel
Used to connect the
operation panel CN12
J12 Interface for connecting the PG card J12
J9/
J10
Factory reserved. Do not short them randomly. Otherwise,
the controller may not work properly.
J9
J10
Table 3-3 Description of indicators on the MCB
Mark Terminal Name Function Description
IS Fault indicator When a fault occurs on the controller, this indicator is
ON (red).
OK Normal running indicator When the controller is in normal running state, this
indicator is ON (green).
CAN Parallel control
communication indicator
This indicator is steady ON (green) when
communication for parallel control is enabled, and blinks
when the running in parallel mode is normal.
L1 to L26 Button input indicator This indicator is ON (green) when the button input is
active.
X1 to X27 Input signal indicator This indicator is ON (green) when the external input is
active.
Y0 to Y22 Output signal indicator This indicator is ON (green) when the system output is
active.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE1000new User Manual- 40 -
3.3.2 Description of the MCTC-KZ-D Extension Card
The extension card is mainly used for extension of floor button inputs and relay outputs.
1. Installation method and dimensions
The following figure shows installation of the MCTC-KZ-D. The CN2 interface of the
MCTC-KZ-D is connected to the CN5 interface on the MCB of the NICE1000 new by using a
connection cable.
Figure 3-6 Appearance and installation of the MCTC-KZ-D
MCTC-KZ-D
CN2
CN3 CN4
CN1
CN5
Connection cable
Figure 3-7 Mounting dimensions of the MCTC-KZ-D
MCTC-KZ-D
CN2
CN3
L31
L32
L33
L34
L35
L36
L37
L38
L41
L42
L43
L44
L45
L46
L47
L48
L49
L39
L40
L50
79
130
70
121
L30
L29
L28
L27
CN4
YM
Y27
Y26
Y25
Y24
Y23
Y5
Y4
CN1
L27 L28 L29 L30 L31 L32 L33 L34 L35 L36 L37 L38 L39 L40 L41 L42 L43 L44 L45 L46 L47 L48 L49 L50
Y27
Y26
Y25
Y24
Y23
Y4
Y3
Unit: mm
2. Function description of terminals
Table 3-4 Function description of terminals
Mark Code Terminal Name Function Description Terminal Arrangement
CN3 L27 to L38 Button function
selection
Button input and button
indicator output,
24 V power for button
illumination
CN3
L37
L36
L35
L34
L33
L32
L31
L30
L29
L28
L27
L38
L48
L47
L46
L45
L44
L43
L42
L41
L40
CN4
L50
L49
L39
CN4 L39 to L50 Button function
selection
Button input and button
indicator output,
24 V power for button
illuminationDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation- 41 -
Mark Code Terminal Name Function Description Terminal Arrangement
CN1 YM/Y4/Y5/
Y23 to Y27 Relay output
Normally-open (NO),
maximum current and
voltage rating:
5 A, 250 VAC
Function set in F7-03 to
F7-27
Y26
Y25
Y24
Y23
Y5
Y4
YM
Y27
CN1
CN2 Interface for connection to the MCB CN2
3. Indicators
Table 3-5 Description of indicators on the MCTC-KZ-D
Mark Terminal Name Function Description
L27 to L50
Extension button signal
collection/feedback
indicator
When the extension floor button input signal is active
and the response signal is output, this indicator is ON
(green).
Y4, Y5,
Y23 to Y27
Extension relay output
signal indicator
When the extension relay output of the system is
active, this indicator is ON (green).
3.3.3 Selection and Use of the MCTC-PG Card
The NICE1000 new can implement CLVC only with use of the MCTC-PG card. The following
figures show the appearance of the MCTC-PG card and its installation on the controller.
Directly insert the J1 terminal of the MCTC-PG card into the J12 terminal of the controller.
Figure 3-8 Appearance of the MCTC-PG card and its installation on the controller
J1
MCTC-PG
card
CN1
J12
Directly insert
1. Model selection
Monarch provides four PG card models, MCTC-PG-A2, MCTC-PG-D, MCTC-PG-E and
MCTC-PG-F1 for different encoder types, as described in the following table.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE1000new User Manual- 42 -
Table 3-6 Selection of the MCTC-PG card models
Encoder Type Adaptable PG Card Appearance
Push-pull encoder
Open-collector incremental
encoder
MCTC-PG-A2
12V
PGM
PGA
PGB
MCTC-PG-A2 J1CN1
UVW encoder MCTC-PG-D J1
MCTC-PG-D
CN1 D2
D5
D8
D11
D14
M AI
CN2
SIN/COS encoder MCTC-PG-E J1MCTC-PG-ECN1
Absolute encoder
(ECN413/1313) MCTC-PG-F1 J1MCTC-PG-F1CN1
2. Terminal wiring and description
The MCTC-PG card is connected to the controller and the encoder as follows:
The J1 terminal and CN1 terminal of the MCTC-PG card are respectively connected to the
J12 terminal of the MCB on the controller and the encoder of the motor.
Different MCTC-PG card models are connected to the MCB in the same way. The
connection method to the encoder depends on the CN1 terminal of the model.
The following figure shows the wiring between MCTC-PG-E and the controller.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation- 43 -
Figure 3-9 Wring between MCTC-PG-E and the controller
NICE1000 new
R
S
T
Three-phase AC
power supply
Safety
contactor
M
Braking resistor
+ – PB U
V
W
PG card
EncoderMotor
J1 CN1
MCTC-PG-E
The following table defines the CN1 terminals of different MCTC-PG card models.
Table 3-7 Definitions of the CN1 terminals of different MCTC-PG card models
MCTC-
PG-A2 MCTC-PG-D MCTC-PG-E MCTC-PG-F1
1 12V 1 A+ 6 N/A 11 W+ 1 B- 6 A- 11 C- 1 B- 6 A- 11 CLOCK-
2 PGM 2 A- 7 U+ 12 W- 2 N/A 7 COM 12 D+ 2 N/A 7 GND 12 DATA+
3 PGA 3 B+ 8 U- 13 VCC 3 Z+ 8 B+ 13 D- 3 N/A 8 B+ 13 DATA-
4 PGB 4 B- 9 V+ 14 COM 4 Z- 9 VCC 14 N/A 4 N/A 9 5V (Up) 14 N/A
5 N/A 10 V- 15 N/A 5 A+ 10 C+ 15 N/A 5 A+ 10 CLOCK+ 15 5V
(Sensor)
12V
PGM
PGA
PGB
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
6
7
8
13
14
15
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
6
7
8
13
14
15
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
6
7
8
13
14
15
CN1
3. Precautions on connecting the MCTC-PG card
• The cable connecting the MCTC-PG card and the encoder must be separated from the
cables of the control circuit and the power circuit. Parallel cabling in close distance is
forbidden.
• The cable from the MCTC-PG card to the encoder must be a shielded cable. The shield
must be connected to the PE on the controller side. To minimize interference, single-end
grounding is suggested.
• The cable from the MCTC-PG card to the encoder must run through the duct separately
and the metal shell is reliably grounded.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE1000new User Manual- 44 -
3.3.4 Selection of Adaptable Motor
The main counters of the electrical relationship between the controller and the motor are
voltage and current.
1. In general elevator applications, the input mains voltage is 380 V, and the motor voltage
can only be equal to or smaller than 380 V. Thus, when selecting the NICE1000new
, you
can take only the current of the motor into consideration.
2. When the NICE1000 new is designed, large safety allowance is reserved for the main
power module. The controller can run properly within the nominal output current. During
stable running, the maximum output torque is 150% of the rated torque and can reach
up to 200% of the rated torque for a short time.
Therefore, for the motor with the rated voltage of 380 V, you can select the controller of
the same power class. As long as the rated current of the motor is smaller than the output
current of the controller, the controller of the same power class can also be used.
Generally, select an adaptable motor based on the output current of the controller and
ensure that the rated current of the motor is equal to or smaller than the output current of
the controller. For technical specifications of the controller, see section 2.3.
3.3.5 Selection and Use of the Hall Display Board
Monarch does not provide the display board, and customers need to prepare the appropriate
board yourselves. The NICE1000 new supports four different types of display boards. For
details, see the descriptions of FE-12 in chapter 7.
3.4 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices
3.4.1 Description of Peripheral Electrical Devices
1. Do not install the capacitor or surge suppressor on the output side of the controller.
Otherwise, it may cause faults to the controller or damage to the capacitor and surge
suppressor.
2. Inputs/Outputs (main circuit) of the controller contain harmonics, which may interfere
with the communication device connected to the controller. Therefore, install an anti-
interference filter to minimize the interference.
3. Select the peripheral devices based on actual applications as well as by referring to
section 3.4.2.
The following table describes the peripheral electrical devices.
Table 3-8 Description of peripheral electrical devices
Part Mounting Location Function Description
MCCB Forefront of controller
power input side
Cut off the power supply of the controller and
provide short-circuit protection.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation- 45 -
Part Mounting Location Function Description
Safety
contactor
Between MCCB and the
controller input side
Apply/Cut off the power supply of the controller.
The close/open of the contactor is controlled by the
external safety circuit.
AC input
reactor Controller input side
Improve the power factor of the input side.
Eliminate the higher harmonics on the input side to
provide effective protection on the rectifier bridge.
Eliminate the input current unbalance due to
unbalance between the power phases.
AC
output
reactor
Between the controller
output side and the motor,
close to the controller
If the distance between the controller and the
motor is greater than 100 m, install an AC output
reactor.
3.4.2 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices
Proper cable specification and cabling greatly improves anti-interference capability and
safety of the system, facilitating installation and commissioning and enhancing system
running stability.
The following table describes the specifications of peripheral electrical devices for selection.
Table 3-9 Specification of peripheral electrical devices for selection
Controller Model MCCB
(A)
Contactor
(A)
Cable of Main
Circuit (mm²)
Cable of Control
Circuit (mm²)
Grounding Cable
(mm²)
Single-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%, 50/60 Hz
NICE-L-H-2002 16 12 1 0.75 1
NICE-L-H-2003 20 18 2.5 0.75 2.5
220-NICE-L-H-4007 25 18 4 0.75 4
220-NICE-L-H-4011 40 25 6 0.75 6
220-NICE-L-H-4015 50 32 6 0.75 6
220-NICE-L-H-4018 50 38 6 0.75 6
220-NICE-L-H-4022 63 50 10 0.75 10
220-NICE-L-H-4030 80 65 16 0.75 16
Three-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%, 50/60 Hz
NICE-L-H-2002 16 12 1.5 0.75 1.5
NICE-L-H-2003 25 18 2.5 0.75 2.5
220-NICE-L-H-4007 32 25 4 0.75 4
220-NICE-L-H-4011 40 32 6 0.75 6
220-NICE-L-H-4015 50 38 6 0.75 6
220-NICE-L-H-4018 63 40 10 0.75 10
220-NICE-L-H-4022 80 50 10 0.75 10
220-NICE-L-H-4030 100 65 16 0.75 16Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE1000new User Manual- 46 -
Controller Model MCCB
(A)
Contactor
(A)
Cable of Main
Circuit (mm²)
Cable of Control
Circuit (mm²)
Grounding Cable
(mm²)
Three-phase 380 V, range: -15% to 20%, 50/60 Hz
NICE-L-H-4002 10 9 0.75 0.75 0.75
NICE-L-H-4003 16 12 1.5 0.75 1.5
NICE-L-H-4005 25 18 2.5 0.75 2.5
NICE-L-H-4007 32 25 4 0.75 4
NICE-L-H-4011 40 32 6 0.75 6
NICE-L-H-4015 50 38 6 0.75 6
NICE-L-H-4018 63 40 10 0.75 10
NICE-L-H-4022 80 50 10 0.75 10
NICE-L-H-4030 100 65 16 0.75 16
NICE-L-H-4037 100 80 25 0.75 16
NICE-L-H-4045 160 95 35 0.75 16
NICE-L-H-4055 160 115 50 0.75 25
3.5 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the NICE1000new Control System
Figure 3-10 Electrical wiring diagram of the NICE1000 new control system
See the last page of this chapter.
3.6 Installation of Shaft Position Signals
In elevator control, to implement landing accurately and running safely, the car position
needs to be identified based on shaft position signals.
These shaft position signals include the leveling switches, up/down slow-down switches, up/
down limit switches, and up/down final limit switches.
These shaft position signals are directly transmitted by the shaft cables to the MCB of the
controller. For the electrical wiring method, refer to Figure 3-10.
The following figure shows the arrangement of shaft position signals in the shaft.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation- 47 -
Figure 3-11 Arrangement of shaft position signals
Leveling plate
(floor N)
L
80 ≤ D ≤ 200 mm
150 mm
L >2 x F3-08
V²
Top leveling
position
D
L
150 mm
Up final limit
switch
Up limit
switch
30-50 mm
(V: Rated
elevator speed)
Up slow-down switch
Down slow-down switch
Bottom leveling
position
Down limit
switch
Down final
limit switch
30─50 mm
L >2 x F3-08
V² (V: Rated
elevator speed)
3.6.1 Installation of Leveling Signals
Leveling signals comprise the leveling switch and leveling plate and are directly connected
to the input terminal of the controller. It is used to enable the car to land at each floor
accurately.
The leveling switches are generally installed on the top of the car. The NICE1000new
system supports a maximum of three leveling switches; by default, a leveling switch is used.
The leveling plate is installed on the guide rail in the shaft. A leveling plate needs to be
installed at each floor. Ensure that leveling plates at all floors are mounted with the same
depth and verticality.
The following figure shows the installation of leveling signalsDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE1000new User Manual- 48 -
Figure 3-12 Installation of leveling signals
Car
Door zone signal
detection
Leveling
switch
Leveling
plate
The following table describes the installation requirements of leveling switches
Table 3-10 Installation requirements of leveling switches
Number of
Leveling
Switches
Installation Method Connecting to Input Terminals of
Controller
Setting of Function
Code
1 Door zone
signal detection
+24 VDC
Door zone
signal X1
F5-01 = 03 (NO)
X1
+24 VDC
Door zone
signal
F5-01 = 103
(normally closed, NC)
2
Up leveling
signal detection
Down leveling
signal detection
+24 VDC
(X22 and X24 are recommended)
Down leveling
Up leveling X22
X23
X24
F5-22 = 101 (NC)
F5-24 = 102 (NC)
Down leveling
Up leveling X22
X23
+24 VDC
(X22 and X24 are recommended)
X24
F5-22 = 01 (NO)
F5-24 = 02 (NO)
3 Door zone
signal detection
Up leveling
signal detection
Down leveling
signal detection
+24 VDC
(X22, X23, and X24 are recommended)
Down leveling
Up leveling X22
X23
X24
Door zone signal
F5-22 = 101 (NC)
F5-23 = 103 (NC)
F5-24 = 102 (NC)
+24 VDC
(X22, X23, and X24 are recommended)
X22
X23
X24Down leveling
Up leveling
Door zone signal
F5-22 = 01 (NO)
F5-23 = 03 (NO)
F5-24 = 02 (NO)
3.6.2 Installation of Slow-Down Switches
The slow-down switch is one of the key protective components of the NICE1000 new
,
protecting the elevator from over travel top terminal or over travel bottom terminal at
maximum speed when the elevator position becomes abnormal.
The NICE1000 new system supports one pair of slow-down switches.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation- 49 -
The slow-down distance L indicates the distance from the slow-down switch to the leveling
plate at the terminal floor. The calculating formula is as follows:
L >2 x F3-08
V²
In the formula, "L" indicates the slow-down distance, "In" indicates the F0-04 (Rated elevator
speed), and "F3-08" indicates the special deceleration rate.
The default value of F3-08 (Special deceleration rate) is 0.5 m/s2 . The slow-down distances
calculated based on different rated elevator speeds are listed in the following table:
Table 3-11 Slow-down distances based on different rated elevator speeds
Rated Elevator
Speed (m/s) 0.25 0.4 0.5 0.63 0.75 1.0 1.5 1.6 1.75
Distance of
Slow-down
Switch (m)
0.3–0.4 0.5–0.6 0.6–0.8 0.8–1.0 0.9–1.2 1.2–1.5 1.8–2.5
Note
• The slow-down switch supports the terminal floor reset function. It must be installed between
the leveling plates of the terminal floor and the secondary terminal floor.
• If the distance between these two floors is small and the installation distance of the slow-down
switch is outside the installation range of these two floors, enable the super short function by
setting Bit14 or Bit15 of F6-07.
3.6.3 Installation of Limit Switches
The up limit switch and down limit switch protect the elevator from over travel top/bottom
terminal when the elevator does not stop at the leveling position of the terminal floor.
• The up limit switch needs to be installed 30−50 mm away from the top leveling position.
The limit switch acts when the car continues to run upward 30−50 mm from the top
leveling position.
• The down limit switch needs to be installed 30−50 mm away from the bottom leveling
position. The limit switch acts when the car continues to run downward 30−50 mm from
the bottom leveling position.
3.6.4 Installation of Final Limit Switches
The final limit switch is to protect the elevator from over travel top/bottom terminal when the
elevator does not stop completely upon passing the up/down limit switch.
• The up final limit switch is mounted above the up limit switch. It is usually 150 mm away
from the top leveling position.
• The down final limit switch is mounted below the down limit switch. It is usually 150 mm
away from the bottom leveling position.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE1000new User Manual- 50 -Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical InstallationFigure 3-10 Electrical wiring diagram of the NICE1000 new control system
Up slow-down switch
RUN contactor feedback
Brake contactor feedback
Inspection up
Inspection signal
Inspection down
Up limit
Down limit
NICE1000 new
CN1
CN6
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
X17
X18
X19
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
R
S
T
Three-phase
AC power
supply
Safety
contactor
Braking resistor
+ – PB
J12
CN12
+24 VDC
Down slow-down switch
Overload
Light curtain
Door close limit
Inspection
circuit
Analog load cell
signal
MCTC-PG
PG card
Note:
1. Functions of I/O terminals are set in
parameters of groups F5, F6, and F7.
2 . T h i s f i g u r e s h o w s o n l y a w i r i n g
example. The wiring method varies with
the type of the display board.
3. The extension board is used only
when the I/O terminals on the MCB do
not meet requirements.
4. The parameter setting is the default.
Set the parameters onsite based on
actual requirements.
Through zone
Inspection
common
Up
Short shaft
safety switches
X4
X5
X6
+24 VDC Car top
inspection Emergency electric operation
1 2
3 4
1 23 4
1 2
1 2 1 2
1 2
5 65 6
Up
Down
Down
1 2
24V
WITHWITH
Fire emergency
Elevator lock
Door open limit
X16
X15
Attendant state
Direction change
Shorting motor stator feedback
Emergency evacuation feedback
M
IN
In
IN
Encoder
Motor Braking
mechanism
Shield
RUN
contactor
K2
CAN+
GND
AGAINST-
MOD+
CAN-
GND
Reserved
Designated for
parallel control
Door 1 open button
Door 1 close button
Door 1 open delay button
Floor 1 door 1 car call
Floor 2 door 1 car call
Floor 3 door 1 car call
Floor 4 door 1 car call
Floor 5 door 1 car call
Floor 1 door 1 up call
Floor 2 door 1 up call
Floor 3 door 1 up call
Floor 4 door 1 up call
Floor 2 door 1 down call
Floor 3 door 1 down call
Floor 4 door 1 down call
Floor 5 door 1 down call
CN5
S1
Cables
RUN contactor output
RUN contactor output COM
Brake contactor output
Brake contactor output COM
Fan/Lamp output
Fan/Lamp output COM
CN9
CN3
CN4
CN2
CN2
CN3 CN4
AI-M
AI
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
WITH
24V
L11
L12
L13
L14
L10
L9
L23
L24
L25
L26
L15
L16
L17
L18
L22
L21
L19
L20
+24 VDC -24 VDC
Button input
of in-car
operation box
Y8
Y9
YM1
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
Y14
Y7
Y6
CN7
Safety circuit
RUN
Brake
-110 VAC+110 VAC
Y1
M1
Y2
M2
Y3
M3
XCM
X25
X26
X27
M0
Y0
Door lock circuit 1
Door lock circuit 2
YM2
Y17
Y18
Y19
Y20
Y21
Y22
YM3
Y16
Y15
Buzzer output
Overload output
BCD code
display board
Reserved
Door 1 open output
Door 1 close output
Low 7-segment a output
Low 7-segment b output
Low 7-segment c output
Low 7-segment d output
Inspection output
CN8
BCD code high-order bit output
Door
machine
Reserved
Reserved
Returning to base floor at fire emergency
Minus sign display output
Down arrow display output
Up arrow display output +24 VDC
MF.KRUN STOP
RES
QUICK
PRG ENTER
RUN LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC
RPM %
A InHz
CN1
CN10 USB
interface
YM
Y27
Y26
Y25
Y24
Y23
Y5
Y4
L34
L33
L32
L31
L30
L29
L28
L27
L50
L49
L35
L36
L37
L38
L48
L47
L46
L45
L44
L43
L42
L41
L40
L39
Relay
output
Button input and button indicator output
MCTC-KZ-D
extension card
BCD code
display board
BCD code
display board
Top
floor
Bottom
floor
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Power supply
of door
machine signal
Safety/Door lock
COM circuit
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Lamp/Fan
running
Segment d
High-order bit
Inspection
Minus sign
display
Up arrow
Down arrow
Segment c
Segment b
Segment a
Segment d
High-order bit
Inspection
Minus sign
display
Up arrow
Down arrow
Segment c
Segment b
Segment a
Segment d
High-order bit
Inspection
Minus sign
display
Up arrow
Down arrow
Segment c
Segment b
Segment aDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
4
Use of the Commissioning ToolsDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Use of the Commissioning Tools NICE1000new User Manual- 52 -
Chapter 4 Use of the Commissioning Tools
The NICE1000 new supports three commissioning tools, S1 button on the MCB, LED
operation panel, and host computer monitoring software NEMS.
Tool Function Description Remark
S1 button The keypad provides the S1 button to carry out shaft
auto-tuning. Standard
LED operation
panel
It is used to view and modify parameters related to
elevator drive and control. Optional
NEMS
monitoring
software
It is used to monitor the current elevator state, view
and modify all parameters, and upload and download
parameters on the PC.
Optional.
Download the software
at www.szmctc.com.
Andriod
cell phone
commissioning
software
(EDSAP)
A Bluetooth module is used to connect the MCB
and the Android cell phone installed with the
commissioning software, through which you can
commission the elevator, and upload and download
parameters.
The software does not
provide the English
version currently.
4.1 Use of the LED Operation Panel
The LED operation panel is connected to the RJ45 interface of the controller by using an
8-core flat cable. You can modify the parameters, monitor the working status and start or
stop the controller by operating the operation panel. The following figure shows the LED
operation panel.
Figure 4-1 Diagram of the LED operation panel
MF.KRUN STOP
RES
QUICK
PRG ENTER
RUN LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC
RPM %
A VHz
Data display
Programming
key
Function
indicator
RUN key
Fault hiding key
Stop/Reset key
Shift key
Increment key
Decrement
key
Confirm key
Unit indicator
Menu key
4.1.1 Description of Indicators
• RUN
ON indicates that the controller is in the running state, and OFF indicates that the
controller is in the stop state.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000new User Manual Use of the Commissioning Tools- 53 -
• LOCAL/REMOT
Reserved.
• FWD/REV
ON indicates down direction of the elevator, and OFF indicates up direction of the
elevator.
• TUNE/TC
ON indicates the auto-tuning state.
• Unit Indicators
means that the indicator is ON, and means that the indicator is OFF.
Hz A V
RPM % Hz: unit of frequency
Hz A V
RPM % A: unit of current
Hz A V
RPM % V: unit of voltage
Hz A V
RPM % RPM: unit of rotational speed
Hz A V
RPM % %: percentage
4.1.2 Description of Keys on the Operation Panel
Table 4-2 Description of keys on the operation panel
Key Name Function
PRG Programming Enter or exit Level-I menu.
ENTER Confirm Enter the menu interfaces level by level, and confirm the
parameter setting.
Increment Increase data or function code.
Decrement Decrease data or function code.
Shift
Select the displayed parameters in turn in the stop or
running state, and select the digit to be modified when
modifying parameters.
RUN Run Start the controller in the operation panel control mode.
STOP
RES Stop/Reset Stop the controller when it is in the running state and
perform the reset operation when it is in the fault state.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Use of the Commissioning Tools NICE1000new User Manual- 54 -
QUICK Quick Enter or exit Level-I quick menu.
MF.K Fault hiding Press this key to display or hide the fault information in
the fault state, which facilitates parameter viewing.
4.1.3 Operation Procedure
The LED operation panel adopts three-level menu.
The three-level menu consists of function code group (Level I), function code (Level II), and
function code setting value (level III), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-2 Operation procedure on the operation panel
F0
F0.06
50.00
(Select the function
code group)
(Select the
function code)
(Set the value of
the function code)
Level-I menu
Level-II menu
Level-III menu
PRG
PRG
Not to save
the setting
ENTER
To save
the setting
ENTER
0.000
ENTER
Status parameter
PRG
F0.07 ENTER
PRG
Next function
code
(default display)
If there is a blinking digit, press
/ / to modify the digit.
You can return to Level II menu from Level III menu by pressing PRG or ENTER . The
difference between the two is as follows:
• After you press ENTER , the system saves the parameter setting first, and then goes back
to Level II menu and shifts to the next function code.
• After you press PRG , the system does not save the parameter setting, but directly
returns to Level II menu and remains at the current function code.
The following figure shows the shift between the three levels of menus.
Figure 4-3 Shift between the three levels of menus
Fd
…FX-00
PRG
ENTER
FE FP F0 F1 F2
F3
FE-00
FE-56 FP-02 F0-07 F1-25 F2-18 F3-21
FP-00 F0-00 F1-00 F2-00 F3-00Fd-00
Fd-26Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000new User Manual Use of the Commissioning Tools- 55 -
In Level III menu, if the parameter has no blinking digit, it means that the parameter cannot
be modified. This may be because:
• Such a parameter is only readable, such as actually detected parameters and running
record parameters.
• Such a parameter cannot be modified in the running state and can only be changed at
stop.
4.1.4 Viewing Status Parameters
In the stop or running state, the operation panel can display multiple status parameters.
Whether parameters are displayed is determined by the equivalent binary bits converted
from the values of FA-01 and FA-02.
In the stop state, a total of 12 parameters can be displayed circularly by pressing . You
can select the parameters to be displayed by setting FA-02 (each of the binary bits converted
from the value of FA-02 indicates a parameter).
Figure 4-4 Shift between parameters displayed in the stop state
Bus voltage
Current floor
Current
position
Car load
Slow-down distance
at rated speed
System state
Input terminal state 1
Input terminal 2 state
Output terminal 1 state
Output terminal 2 state
Set speed
Input terminal 3 state
Shift between parameters
displayed in the stop state
In the running state, a total of 16 parameters can be displayed circularly by pressing . You
can select the parameters to be displayed by setting FA-01 (each of the binary bits converted
from the value of FA-02 indicates a parameter).
Figure 4-5 Shift between parameters displayed in the running state
Set speed
Bus voltage
Output voltage
Output current
Output frequency
Current floor
Current position
Car load
Pre-toque current
Input terminal 1 state
Running speed
System state
Shift between parameters
displayed in the running state
Input terminal 2 state
Output terminal 2 state
Output terminal 1 state
Input terminal 3 state
For details, see the description of corresponding parameters in Chapter 7.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Use of the Commissioning Tools NICE1000new User Manual- 56 -Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5
System Commissioning
and Application ExampleDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE1000new User Manual- 58 -
Chapter 5 System Commissioning and Application Example
5.1 System Commissioning
CAUTION
• Ensure that there is no person in the shaft or car before performing commissioning on the
elevator.
• Ensure that the peripheral circuit and mechanical installation are ready before performing
commissioning.
The following figure shows the commissioning procedure of the system.
Figure 5-1 Commissioning procedure of the system
End
Start
Check the peripheral
circuit
Check the encoder
Set related parameters
of the elevator
Perform motor
auto-tuning
Perform trial
inspection running
Perform shaft
auto-tuning
Perform load cell
auto-tuning
Commission the door
machine controller
Perform trial
normal-speed running
Check the leveling
accuracy
Perform riding comfort
commissioning
Perform function
commissioning
5.1.1 Check Before Commissioning
The elevator needs to be commissioned after being installed; the correct commissioning
guarantees safe and normal running of the elevator. Before performing electric
commissioning, check whether the electrical part and mechanical part are ready for
commissioning to ensure safety.
At least two persons need to be onsite during commissioning so that the power supply can
be cut off immediately when an abnormality occurs.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example- 59 -
1. Check the field mechanical and electric wiring.
Before power-on, check the peripheral wiring to ensure component and personal safety.
The items to be checked include:
1) Whether the component models are matched
2) Whether the safety circuit is conducted and reliable
3) Whether the door lock circuit is conducted and reliable
4) Whether the shaft is unobstructed, and the car has no passenger and meets the
conditions for safe running
5) Whether the cabinet and traction motor are well grounded
6) Whether the peripheral circuit is correctly wired according to the drawings of the vendor
7) Whether all switches act reliably
8) Whether there is short-circuit to ground by checking the inter-phase resistance of the
main circuit
9) Whether the elevator is set to the inspection state
10) Whether the mechanical installation is complete (otherwise, it will result in equipment
damage and personal injury)
2. Check the encoder.
The pulse signal from the encoder is critical to accurate control of the system. Before
commissioning, check the following items carefully:
1) The encoder is installed reliably with correct wiring. For details on the encoder wiring,
see section 3.3.3.
2) The signal cable and strong-current circuit of the encoder are laid in different ducts to
prevent interference.
3) The encoder cable is preferably directly connected to the control cabinet. If the cable
is not long enough and an extension cable is required, the extension cable must be
a shielding cable and preferably welded to the original encoder cable by using the
soldering iron.
4) The shielding cable of the encoder cable is grounded on the end connected to the
controller (only one end is grounded to prevent interference).
3. Check the power supply before power-on.
1) The inter-phase voltage of the user power supply is within (380 V±15%), and the
unbalance degree does not exceed 3%.
2) The power input voltage between terminals 24V and COM on the MCB is within (24
VDC±15%).
3) The total lead-in wire gauge and total switch capacity meet the requirements.
Note
If the input voltage exceeds the allowable value, serious damage will be caused. Distinguish the
negative and positive of the DC power supply. Do not run the system when there is input power
phase loss.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE1000new User Manual- 60 -
4. Check the grounding.
Check that the resistance between the following points and the ground is close to infinity.
־ R, S, T and PE
־ U, V, W and PE
־ 24V and PE on the MCB
־ Motor U, V, W and PE
־ +, – bus terminals and PE
־ Safety circuit, door lock circuit, and inspection circuit terminals and PE
5. Check the grounding terminals of all elevator electrical components and the power supply
of the control cabinet.
5.1.2 Setting and Auto-tuning of Motor Parameters
The NICE1000 new supports two major control modes, sensorless vector control (SVC)
and closed-loop vector control (CLVC). SVC is applicable to inspection speed running for
commissioning and fault judgment running during maintenance of the asynchronous motor.
CLVC is applicable to normal elevator running. In CLVC mode, good driving performance
and running efficiency can be achieved in the prerequisite of correct motor parameters.
■ Motor Parameters to Be Set
The motor parameters that need to be set are listed in the following table.
Table 5-1 Motor parameters to be set
Function Code Parameter Name Description
F1-25 Motor type 0: Asynchronous motor
1: Synchronous motor
F1-00 Encoder type
0: SIN/COS encoder, absolute encoder
1: UVW encoder
2: AB incremental encoder (for
asynchronous motor)
F1-12 Encoder pulses per revolution 0–10000
F1-01 to F1-05
Rated motor power
Rated motor voltage
Rated motor current
Rated motor frequency
Rated motor rotational speed
These parameters are model dependent,
and you need to manually input them
according to the nameplate.
F0-00 Control mode
0: Sensorless vector control (SVC)
1: Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) controlDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example- 61 -
Function Code Parameter Name Description
F0-01 Command source selection 0: Operation panel control
1: Distance control
F1-11 Auto-tuning mode
0: No operation
1: With-load auto-tuning
2: No-load auto-tuning
3: Shaft auto-tuning 1
4: Shaft auto-tuning 2
■ Precautions for Motor Auto-tuning
Follow the following precautions:
• Ensure that all wiring and installation meet the safety specifications.
• Reset the current fault and then start auto-tuning, because the system cannot enter the
auto-tuning state ("TUNE" is not displayed) when there is a fault.
• Perform motor auto-tuning again if the phase sequence or encoder of the synchronous
motor is changed.
• After the auto-tuning is completed, perform trial inspection running. Check whether the
current is normal, whether the actual running direction is the same as the set direction. If
the running direction is different from the set direction, change the value of F2-10.
• With-load auto-tuning is dangerous (inspection-speed running of many control cabinets is
emergency electric running and the shaft safety circuit is shorted). Ensure that there is no
person in the shaft in this auto-tuning mode.
The following figure shows the motor auto-tuning process.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE1000new User Manual- 62 -
Figure 5-2 Motor auto-tuning process
Set F1-25 correctly based on
the actually used motor type
Set encoder parameters F1-00
and F1-12 and motor parameters
F1-01 to F1-05 correctly
Set F0-01 to 0
(Operation panel
control)
For with-load auto-tuning,
set F1-11 to 1. After the
operation panel displays
"TUNE", press the RUN key.
Static motor auto-tuning
starts.
F1-25 = 0
(Asynchronous
motor)
With-load
auto-tuning
F1-25 = 1
(Synchronous motor)
With-load auto-tuning
F0-01 = 1
F1-11 = 1
F0-01 = 0
F1-11 = 2
For no-load auto-tuning, set F1-11
to 2. The operation panel displays
"TUNE". Release the brake
manually and press the RUN key.
Motor auto-tuning starts.
After motor parameters F1-14
to F1-18 are obtained,
restore F0-01 to 1 (Distance
control). Motor auto-tuning is
completed.
Check the initial angle and wiring mode
of the encoder (F1-06 and F1-08) after
motor auto-tuning. Perform motor auto-
tuning multiple times and ensure that
the difference between values of F1-06
is within 5° and values of F1-08 are the
same.
After motor parameter values
(F1-06 to F1-08, F1-14, F1-19 to
F1-20) and current loop
parameters are obtained, restore
F0-01 to 1 (Distance control).
Motor auto-tuning is completed.
No-load auto-tuning No-load auto-tuning
For with-load auto-tuning, set F1-11 to
1. After the operation panel displays
"TUNE", press the UP/DOWN button
for inspection to start auto-tuning. The
motor starts to run.
More descriptions of motor auto-tuning are as follows:
1) When the NICE1000 new drives the synchronous motor, an encoder is required to provide
feedback signals. You must set the encoder parameters correctly before performing motor
auto-tuning.
2) For synchronous motor auto-tuning:
a. In the no-load auto-tuning and with-load auto-tuning, the motor needs to rotate. The best
auto-tuning mode is no-load auto-tuning; if this mode is impossible, then try with-load auto-
tuning.
b. Perform three or more times of auto-tuning, compare the obtained values of F1-06
(Encoder initial angle). The value deviation of F1-06 shall be within ±5°, which indicates that
the auto-tuning is successful.
c. With-load auto-tuning learns stator resistance, shaft-D and shaft-Q inductance, current
loop (including zero servo) PI parameters, and encoder initial angle. No-load auto-tuning
additionally learns the encoder wiring mode.
d. After wiring phase sequence of the motor is changed or the encoder is replaced, perform
motor auto-tuning again.
3) For asynchronous motor:
With-load auto-tuning learns stator resistance, rotor resistance, and leakage inductance,
and automatically calculates the mutual inductance and motor magnetizing current. No-
load auto-tuning learns the mutual inductance, motor magnetizing current, and current loop
parameters.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example- 63 -
4) The motor wiring must be correct (UVW cables of the motor are connected respectively to
UVW terminals of the controller). If the motor wiring is incorrect in the with-load auto-tuning
mode, the motor may jitter or may fail to run and report Err20 (subcode 3). To solve the
problem, replace any two of motor UVW cables.
■ Output State of RUN and Brake Contactors
For the sake of safety in different control modes, the system handles the output commands
to the RUN contactor or brake contactor differently. In some situations, it is necessary to
release the RUN contactor or the brake contactor manually.
The following table lists the output state of the running and brake contactors.
Table 5-2 Output state of the RUN and brake contactors
Control mode
Output State
No-load Auto-
tuning
(F1-11 = 2)
With-load Auto-tuning
(F1-11 = 1)
Operation
Panel
Control
(F0-01 = 0)
Distance
Control
(F0-01 = 1)Synchronous
Motor
Asynchronous
Motor
RUN contactor Output Output Output Not output Output
Brake contactor Not output Output Not output Not output Output
5.1.3 Trial Running at Normal Speed
After ensuring that running at inspection speed is normal, perform shaft auto-tuning, and
then you can perform trial running at normal speed (the elevator satisfies the safety running
requirements).
To perform shaft auto-tuning, the following conditions must be satisfied:
1. The signals of the encoder and leveling sensors (NC, NO) are correct and the slow-
down switches are installed properly and act correctly.
2. When the elevator is at the bottom floor, the down slow-down 1 switch acts.
3. The elevator is in the inspection state. The control mode is distance control and CLVC
(F0-00 = 1, F0-01 = 1).
4. The top floor number (F6-00) and bottom floor number (F6-01) are set correctly.
5. The system is not in the fault alarm state. If there is a fault at the moment, press STOP
RES
to reset the fault.
Then set F1-11 to 3 on the operation panel or hold down S1 on the keypad of the MCB
(release S1 after the motor starts up), and start shaft auto-tuning.
Note
For shaft auto-tuning when there are only two floors, the elevator needs to run to below the bottom
leveling position, that is, the leveling sensor is disconnected from the leveling plate. There is no
such requirement when there are multiple floors.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE1000new User Manual- 64 -
5.1.4 Door Machine Controller Commissioning
The NICE1000 new can control the elevator door properly in the prerequisite that:
1. Wiring between the MCB and the door machine controller is correct.
2. After being commissioned, the door machine controller can open/close the elevator door
properly and feeds back door open/close limit signal correctly in the terminal control mode.
3. The door open/close command output relays on the MCB are set correctly. The NO/NC
states of the door open/close limit signal input contacts are set correctly.
Descriptions of monitoring the elevator door based on the MCB are as follows:
1) F5-28 is used to monitor whether the door open/close signals received by the system are
correct. Segment G/DP of LED3 and segment A/B of LED4 are respectively used to monitor
door 1/2 open limit and door 1/2 close limit.
2) Door open limit monitoring:
In the following figure, if segment G is ON, it indicates that the system has received the door
1 open limit signal, and door 1 should be in open state.
If segment G is OFF when the door is open and ON when the door is closed, it indicates
that the NO/NC states of door 1 open limit signal are set incorrectly. In this case, you need
to correct the setting.
If segment G stays ON or OFF regardless of whether the door is open or closed, it indicates
that MCB does not receive the door open limit signal feedback. In this case, check the door
machine controller and the wiring.
Figure 5-3 Door 1 open limit monitoring (F5-28)
12345
Open by 1
limit
B
A
D
AND
F G
DP
C
3) Door close limit monitoring:
In the following figure, if segment A is ON, it indicates that the system has received the door
1 close limit signal, and door 1 should be in close state.
If segment G is OFF when the door is closed and ON when the door is open, it indicates
that the NO/NC states of door 1 close limit signal are set incorrectly. In this case, you need
to correct the setting.
If segment A stays ON or OFF regardless of whether the door is open or closed, it indicates
that MCB does not receive the door open limit signal feedback. In this case, check the door
machine controller and the wiring.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example- 65 -
Figure 5-4 Door 1 close limit monitoring (F5-28)
12345
Door 1
close limit
B
A
D
E
F G
DP
C
4) In the door open/close process, neither of segments G and A is ON.
5.1.5 Riding Comfort
The riding comfort is an important factor of the elevator's overall performance. Improper
installation of mechanical parts and improper parameter settings will cause discomfort.
Enhancing the riding comfort mainly involves adjustment of the controller output and the
elevator's mechanical construction.
■ Controller Output
The parameters that may influence the riding comfort are described in this part.
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Description
F1-09 Current filter time
(synchronous motor) 0–3 0
It can reduce the lower-
frequency vertical jitter during
running.
F1-18 Magnetizing current 0.01–300.00 0.00 A
Increasing the value can
improve the loading capacity of
the asynchronous motor.
F2-00 Speed loop proportional
gain KP1 0–100 40 F2-00 and F2-01 are the PI
regulation parameters when
the running frequency is
lower than F2-02 (Switchover
frequency 1). F2-03 and
F2-04 are the PI regulation
parameters when the running
frequency is higher than F2-
02 (Switchover frequency 2).
The regulation parameters
between F2-02 and F2-04 are
the weighted average value
of F2-00 & F2-01 and F2-03 &
F2-04.
F2-01 Speed loop integral
time TI1 0.01–10.00s 0.60s
F2-02 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 to F2-05 2.00 Hz
F2-03 Speed loop proportional
gain KP2 0–100 35
F2-04 Speed loop integral
time TI2 0.01–10.00s 0.80s
F2-05 Switchover frequency 2 F2-02 to F0-05 5.00 Hz
For a faster system response, increase the proportional gain and reduce the integral time.
Be aware that a fast system response causes system oscillation.
The recommended regulating method is as follows:
If the default setting cannot satisfy the requirements, make slight regulation. Decrease
the proportional gain first to ensure that the system does not oscillate. Then decrease the
integral time to ensure fast responsiveness and small overshoot.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE1000new User Manual- 66 -
If both F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1) and F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2) are set to 0,
only F2-03 and F2-04 are valid.
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting
Range Default Description
F2-06 Current loop proportional gain 10–500 60 F2-06 and F2-07 are the
current loop adjustment
parameters in the vector
control algorithm.
F2-07 Current loop integral gain 10–500 30
The optimum values of these two parameters are obtained during motor auto-tuning, and
you need not modify them. Appropriate setting of the parameters can restrain jitter during
running and have obvious effect on the riding comfort.
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Description
F2-18 Startup acceleration
time 0.000–1.500s 0.000s It can reduce the terrace
feeling at startup caused by the
breakout friction of the guide
rail.
F3-00 Startup speed 0.000–0.030 m/s 0.000 m/s
F3-01 Startup holding time 0.000–0.500s 0.000s
F3-14 Zero-speed control
time at startup 0.000–1.000s 0.200s
It specifies the zero speed
holding time before brake
output.
F3-15 Brake release delay 0.000–2.000s 0.200s
0.600s
It specifies the brake release
time.
F3-16 Zero-speed control
time at end 0.000–1.000s 0.300s
It specifies the zero speed
holding time after the brake is
applied.
F8-11 Brake apply delay 0.200–1.500s 0.200s It specifies the brake apply time.
Figure 5-5 Running time sequence
V (speed)
t (time)
F3-14
F3-15
F8-11
F3-16
RUN contactor
Brake contactor
Shorting door lock
circuit contactor
Shorting motor stator contactor
Internal running status
Leveling signal
RUN contactor feedback
Brake contactor feedback
Shorting door lock circuit
contactor feedback
Shorting motor stator
contactor feedback
F2-17
F2-16Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example- 67 -
F3-14 (Zero-speed control time at startup) specifies the time from output of the RUN
contactor to output of the brake contactor, during which the controller performs excitation on
the motor and outputs zero-speed current with large startup torque.
F3-15 (Brake release delay) specifies the time from the moment when the system sends
the brake release command to the moment when the brake is completely released, during
which the system retains the zero-speed torque current output.
F3-16 (Zero-speed control time at end) specifies the zero-speed output time when the
running curve ends.
F8-11 (Brake apply delay) specifies the time from the moment when the system sends the
brake apply command to the moment when the brake is completely applied, during which
the system retains the zero-speed torque current output.
The release time of the brakes varies according to the types and the response time of the
brakes is greatly influenced by the ambient temperature. A high brake coil temperature
slows the brake responsiveness. Thus, when the riding comfort at startup or stop cannot
be improved by adjusting zero servo or load cell compensation parameters, appropriately
increase the values of F3-15 and F8-11 to check whether the brake release time influences
the riding comfort.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Remarks
F8-01 Pre-torque
selection
0: Pre-torque invalid
1: Load cell pre-torque
compensation
2: Automatic pre-torque
compensation
0
Set this parameter
based on actual
requirement.
F2-11 Zero servo current
coefficient 0.20%–50.0% 15.0% These are zero-
servo regulating
parameters when
F8-01 is set to
2 (Automatic
pre-torque
compensation).
F2-12 Zero servo speed
loop KP 0.00–2.00 0.50
F2-13 Zero servo speed
loop KI 0.00–2.00 0.60
When F8-01 is set to 2 (Automatic pre-torque compensation), the system automatically
adjusts the compensated torque at startup.
a. Gradually increase F2-11 (Zero servo current coefficient) until that the rollback is
cancelled at brake release and the motor does not vibrate.
b. Decrease the value of F2-11 (Zero servo current coefficient) if the motor jitters when
F2-13 (Zero servo speed loop TI) is less than 1.00.
c. Motor vibration and acoustic noise indicate excessive value of F2-12 (Zero servo speed
loop KP). Decrease the default value of F2-12.
d. If the motor noise is large at no-load-cell startup, decrease the value of F2-12 or F2-13.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE1000new User Manual- 68 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Remarks
F8-02 Pre-torque offset 0.0%–100.0% 50.0%
These are pre-torque
regulating parameters.
F8-03 Drive gain 0.00–2.00 0.60
F8-04 Brake gain 0.00–2.00 0.60
When F8-01 is set to 1 (Load cell pre-torque compensation), the system with a load cell pre-
outputs the torque matched the load to ensure the riding comfort of the elevator.
• Motor driving state: full-load up, no-load down
• Motor braking state: full-load down, no-load up
F8-02 (Pre-torque offset) is actually the elevator balance coefficient, namely, the percentage
of the car load to the rated load when the car and counterweight are balanced.
F8-03 (Drive gain) or F8-04 (Brake gain) scales the elevator’s present pre-torque coefficient
when the motor runs at the drive or brake side. If the gain set is higher, then the calculated
value of startup pro-torque compensation is higher. The controller identifies the braking
or driving state according to the load cell signal and automatically calculates the required
torque compensation value.
When an analog device is used to measure the load, these parameters are used to adjust
the elevator startup. The method of adjusting the startup is as follows:
• In the driving state, increasing the value of F8-03 could reduce the rollback during the
elevator startup, but a very high value could cause car lurch at start.
• In the braking state, increasing the value of F8-04 could reduce the jerk in command
direction during the elevator startup, but a very high value could cause car lurch at start.
■ Mechanical Construction
The mechanical construction affecting the riding comfort involves installation of the guide
rail, guide shoe, steel rope, and brake, balance of the car, and the resonance caused by the
car, guild rail and motor. For asynchronous motor, abrasion or improper installation of the
gearbox may arouse poor riding comfort.
1. Installation of the guide rail mainly involves the verticality and surface flatness of the
guide rail, smoothness of the guide rail connection and parallelism between two guide
rails (including guide rails on the counterweight side).
2. Tightness of the guide shoes (including the one on the counterweight side) also
influences the riding comfort. The guide shoes must not be too loose or tight.
3. The drive from the motor to the car totally depends on the steel rope. Large flexibility of
the steel rope with irregular resistance during the car running may cause curly oscillation
of the car. In addition, unbalanced stress of multiple steel ropes may cause the car to
jitter during running.
4. The riding comfort during running may be influenced if the brake arm is installed too
tightly or released incompletely.
5. If the car weight is unbalanced, it will cause uneven stress of the guide shoes that
connect the car and the guide rail. As a result, the guide shoes will rub with the guide
rail during running, affecting the riding comfort.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example- 69 -
6. For asynchronous motor, abrasion or improper installation of the gearbox may also
affect the riding comfort.
7. Resonance is an inherent character of a physical system, related to the material
and quality of system components. If you are sure that the oscillation is caused by
resonance, reduce the resonance by increasing or decreasing the car weight or
counterweight and adding resonance absorbers at connections of the components (for
example, place rubber blanket under the motor).
5.1.6 Password Setting
The NICE1000 new provides the parameter password protection function. Here gives an
example of changing the password into 12345 ( indicates the blinking digit), as shown in
the following figure.
Figure 5-6 Example of changing the password
F00.000
Status parameter
PRG
(default display)
FPPRG
FP-00
00000
PRG
PRG
ENTER
To save the
setting
ENTER
ENTER
PRG
FP-01
12345
If there is a blinking digit, press
/ / to modify the digit.
• After you set the user password (set FP-00 to a non-zero value), the system requires user
password authentication (the system displays "------") when you press PRG . In this case,
you can modify the function code parameters only after entering the password correctly.
• For factory parameters (group FF), you also need to enter the factory password.
• Do not try to modify the factory parameters. If these parameters are set improperly, the
system may be unstable or abnormal.
• In the password protection unlocked state, you can change the password at any time. The
last input number will be the user password.
• If you want to disable the password protection function, enter the correct password
and then set FP-00 to 0. If FP-00 is a non-zero value at power-on, the parameters are
protected by the password.
• Remember the password you set. Otherwise, the system cannot be unlocked.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE1000new User Manual- 70 -
5.2 System Application
5.2.1 Emergency Evacuation at Power Failure
Passengers may be trapped in the car if power failure suddenly happens during the use of
the elevator. The emergency evacuation function at power failure is designed to solve the
problem.
The emergency evacuation function is implemented in the following two modes:
• Uninterrupted power supply (UPS)
• Emergency automatic rescue device (ARD) power supply
• Shorting PMSM stator
The three modes are described in detailed in the following part.
■ Emergency 220 V UPS
In this scheme, the 220 V UPS provides power supply to the main unit and the drive control
circuit. The following figure shows the emergency 220 V UPS circuit.
Figure 5-7 Emergency 220 V UPS circuit
220 VAC
115 VAC
UPS-220 V
UPC
Safety contactor
21 22
Y0 M0
MCB
61
6221
22
21
3 4
R
N
Transformer
115 VDC
220 VAC
UPS-0 V
(6 A)
(6 A)
65
1413
UPC
NICE1000 new
R
S
T
UPC
CR
The following figure shows various contacts of the contactors.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example- 71 -
Figure 5-8 Various contacts of the contactors
X25
Safety contactor
53 54
11 14
Phase sequence relay
Safety
circuit UPC
UPC
71 72
21 22
UPC
X1924 V
Emergency
feedback
UPC
2
1
4
3
6
5 13
14 22
21
54
53 61
62 72
71 81
82
110 V
The UPS power is recommended in the following table.
Table 5-3 Recommended UPS power for each power class
UPS Power Controller Power
1 kVA (700–800 W) P ≤ 5.5 kW
2 kVA (1400–1600 W) 5.5 kW < P ≤ 11 kW
3 kVA (2100–2400 W) 15 kW ≤ P ≤ 22 kW
The following table lists the setting of the related parameters.
Table 5-4 Parameter setting under the 220 V UPS scheme
Function Code Parameter Name Setting
F6-72 Emergency evacuation switching
speed 0.010–0.630 m/s
F6-73 Evacuation parking floor 0 to F6-01
F8-09 Emergency evacuation operation
speed at power failure 0.000 to F3-11
F3-18 Emergency evacuation
acceleration rate 0.100–1.300 m/s 2
F8-10 Emergency evacuation operation
mode at power failure
0: Invalid
1: UPS
2: 48 V battery power supply
F5-19 (X19) X19 function selection 33 (UPS valid signal)
F7-00 (Y0) Y0 function selection 32 (Emergency evacuation
at power failure)Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE1000new User Manual- 72 -
■ Emergency ARD Power Supply
The ARD is a emergency evacuation device with the self recognition and control functions.
It is connected between the mains supply and the elevator control cabinet. When the mains
supply is normal, it supplies power to the elevator. When the mains supply is interrupted, the
ARD supplies power to the main circuit and control circuit.
The following figure shows the schematic diagram.
Figure 5-9 Three-phase emergency ARD power supply
L1
L2
L3
R
Power
distribution
box
X19
24V
S
T
R
S
T
R
Elevator control cabinet
Emergency
evacuation
signal output
Phase shorting
output
11
14
ARD for
emergency leveling
at power failure
Phase relay
L1
L2 S
T
1
2
3
4
L3
NICE1000 new
Safety circuit 110 V
ARD
11 14 X25 MCB
Emergency
feedback 24 V
ARD
1 2 X19 MCB
3 4
Phase relay
Figure 5-10 Single-phase emergency ARD power supply
L1
N1
L0
Power
distribution
box
X19
24V
S
R
S
T
R
Elevator control cabinet
Emergency
evacuation
signal output
ARD for
emergency leveling
at power failure NICE1000 new
L1
N1 N0
1
2
Emergency
feedback 24 V
ARD
1 2 X19 MCBDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example- 73 -
The related configuration and description is as follows:
Select the ARD with the nominal output power equal to or larger than the rated motor power.
Monarch 380V ARD outputs the single-phase emergency voltage between the R and T
phases to the control cabinet. Note that for ARDs of other brands, the phases that output the
emergency voltage may be different.
Table 5-5 Parameter setting under the ARD scheme
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range
F6-72 Emergency evacuation switching speed 0.010–0.630 m/s
F6-73 Evacuation parking floor 0 to F6-01
F8-09 Emergency evacuation operation speed
at power failure 0.000 to F3-11
F3-18 Emergency evacuation acceleration rate 0.100–1.300 m/s2
F8-10 Emergency evacuation operation mode
at power failure
0: Invalid
1: UPS
2: 48 V battery power supply
F5-19 (X19) X19 function selection 33 (UPS valid signal)
■ Shorting PMSM Stator
Shorting PMSM stator means shorting phases UVW of the PMSM, which produces
resistance to restrict movement of the elevator car. In field application, an auxiliary NC
contact is usually added to the NO contact of the output contactor to short PMSM UVW
phases to achieve the effect. It is feasible in theory but may cause overcurrent actually.
Due to poor quality of the contactor and wiring of adding the auxiliary contact, the residual
current of the controller is still high when the outputs UVW are shorted at abnormal stop.
This results in an overcurrent fault and may damage the controller or motor.
Monarch's shorting PMSM stator scheme requires installation of an independent contactor
for shorting PMSM stator. The shorting PMSM stator function is implemented via the NC
contact of the relay. On the coil circuit of the RUN contactor, an NO contact of the shorting
PMSM stator contactor is connected in serial, to ensure that output short-circuit does not
occur when the parameter setting is incorrect.
The following figure shows wiring of the independent shorting PMSM stator contactor.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE1000new User Manual- 74 -
Figure 5-11 Wiring of the independent shorting PMSM stator contactor
Y1
M1
FX: Shorting PMSM stator contactor
SW: RUN contactor
NICE1000 new
CN7
Y1
M1
Y2
M2
Y3
M3
Y4
M4
Y5
M5
Y6
M6
R
S
T
Three-phase AC
power supply
Safety
contactor
Braking resistor
+ – PB U
V
W
Safety circuit
5 6
FX
1 2
3 4
5 6
FX
1 2
3 4
M
Encoder
Motor
MCTC-PG
Y3
M3 110 VAC
FX
SW
X18CN6
X20
24 V
Shield
C R
RC
SW
The parameter setting in such wiring mode is described in the following table.
Table 5-6 Parameter setting under the shorting PMSM stator scheme
Function
Code Parameter Name Value Description
F5-20 X20 function selection 7 Allocate X20 with the input "Shorting PMSM
stator feedback".
F7-03 Y3 function selection 05 Allocate Y3 with "Shorting PMSM stator
contactor".
FE-14 Elevator function
selection 2 - Bit10 = 0: NC output contactor
Bit10 = 1: NO output contactor
More details on the emergency evacuation setting are provided in F6-69, as listed in the
following table.
Table 5-7 Parameter description of F6-69
Bit Function
Description Binary Setting Remarks
Bit0
Direction
determine
mode
0
Automatically
calculating
the direction
0
Load
direction
determining
(based on
load cell
data or half-
load signal)
1 Direction
of
nearest
landing
floor
If the torque
direction is
automatically
calculated, the no-
load-cell function
must be enabled,
that is, F8-01 is set
to 2.
Bit1 0 1 0
Bit2 Stop position 1 Stop at the base floor -
0 Stop at nearest landing floor -Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example- 75 -
Bit Function
Description Binary Setting Remarks
Bit4 Startup
compensation 1 Startup torque compensation valid in
emergency evacuation running
When it is set
that the torque
direction is
automatically
calculated,
enable automatic
startup torque
compensation.
Bit8
Emergency
evacuation
running time
protection
1
If the elevator does not arrive at the required
floor after 50s emergency evacuation running
time, Err33 is reported.
This function
is invalid when
the function of
switching over
shorting stator
braking mode to
controller drive is
used.
Bit10 Emergency
buzzer output 1 The buzzer output is active during UPS
emergency evacuation running. -
Bit12
Shorting stator
braking mode
switched over
to controller
drive
1 Enable the function of switching over the
shorting stator braking mode to controller drive. -
Bit13
Mode of
shorting stator
braking mode
switched over
to controller
drive
1 Speed setting
If the speed is still
lower than the
value set in F6-72
after the elevator
is in shorting stator
braking mode for
10s, the controller
starts to drive the
elevator.
0 Time setting
If the time of the
shorting stator
braking mode
exceeds the time
set in F6-75, the
controller starts to
drive the elevator.
Bit14
Emergency
evacuation
exit mode
1 Exit at door close limit -
0 Exit at door open limit -
Bit15
Function
selection of
shorting stator
braking mode
1 Enable this function.
When this function
is enabled, the
setting of related
function codes
becomes effective.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE1000new User Manual- 76 -
5.2.2 Parallel Control of Two Elevators
The NICE1000 new supports parallel control of two elevators, which is implemented by using
the CANbus communication port for information exchange and processing between the two
elevators, improving elevator use efficiency.
■ Parameter Setting
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Setting in Parallel Control
Fd-03 Number of elevators in
parallel control mode 1–2 2
Fd-04 Elevator No. 1–2 Master elevator: 1
Slave elevator: 2
■ Wiring for Parallel Control Communication
Connect the CN3 terminals of the controllers for the two elevators, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 5-12 Wiring for parallel control communication
NICE1000 new CN3 NICE1000 new
CN3
Elevator 1# Elevator 2#
CAN+
CAN-
GND
CAN communication
cable for parallel control CAN+
CAN-
GND
■ Function Description
Physical floor, relative to the NICE control system, is defined by the installation position of
the leveling plate. The floor (such as the ground floor) at which the lowest leveling plate is
installed corresponds to physical floor 1. The top physical floor is the accumulative number
of the leveling plates. In parallel mode, the physical floor numbers of the same floor for two
elevators are consistent.
If the floor structures of two elevators are different, the physical floor numbers should start
with the floor with the lowest position. The physical floors at the overlapped area of the two
elevators are the same. Even if one elevator does not stop a floor in the overlapped area, a
leveling plate should be installed there. You can make the elevator not stop at the floor by
setting service floors.
When two elevators are in parallel mode, the hall call and car call wiring and setting should
be performed according to physical floors. Parallel running can be implemented only when
the hall call and car call setting for one elevator is the same as that for the other elevator in
terms of the same floor.
Note
In parallel mode, the top floor (F6-00) and bottom floor (F6-01) of the elevators should be set
based on corresponding physical floors.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example- 77 -
Assume that there are two elevators in parallel mode. Elevator 1 stops at floor B1, floor 1,
floor 2, and floor 3, while elevator 2 stops at floor 1, floor 3, and floor 4. Now, you need to
set related parameters according to the following table.
Table 5-8 Parameter and address setting of two elevators
Elevator 1 Elevator 2
Number of elevators
in parallel mode
(Fd-03)
2 2
Elevator No. (Fd-04) 1 2
Actual
floor
Physical
floor Hall call input Hall call display Hall call input Hall call
display
B1 1 Terminal L floor 1 FE-01 = 1101 - -
1 2 Terminal L floor 2 FE-02 = 1901 Terminal L floor 2 FE-02 = 1901
2 3 Terminal L floor 3 FE-03 = 1902 Non-stop floor but
leveling plate required FE-03 = 1902
3 4 Terminal L floor 4 FE-04 = 1903 Terminal L floor 4 FE-04 = 1903
4 5 - - Terminal L floor 5 FE-05 = 1904
Bottom floor
(F6-01) 1 2
Top floor (F6-00) 4 5
Service floor (F6-05) 65535 65531 (not stop at physical floor 3)
5.2.3 Opposite Door Control
The NICE1000 new supports four opposite door control modes: mode 1, mode 2, mode 3, and
mode 4, as described in the following table.
Table 5-9 Opposite door control modes and parameter setting
Opposite
Door Control
Mode
Mode
Description Function Description Supported Floors
Mode 1:
Fb-01 = 0
Simultaneous
control
The front door and back door acts
simultaneously upon arrival for hall calls
and car calls.
≤ 8 (standard)
≤ 16 (after
extension)
Mode 2:
Fb-01 = 1
Hall call
independent,
car call
simultaneous
The corresponding door opens upon
arrival for hall calls from this door.
The front door and back door act
simultaneously upon arrival for car calls.
≤ 4 (standard)
≤ 8 (after extension)Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE1000new User Manual- 78 -
Opposite
Door Control
Mode
Mode
Description Function Description Supported Floors
Mode 3:
Fb-01 = 2
Hall call
independent,
car call manual
control
Two methods are available to enable
mode 3.
Method 1: F6-64 Bit4 (Opening only one
door of opposite doors under manual
control = 1, DI with function 46 "Single/
Double door selection" inactive in this
case.
A. The front door opens upon arrival for
hall calls from the front door, and the
back door opens upon arrival for hall
calls from the back door.
B. By default, the front door opens upon
arrival for car calls. If the DI with function
31 "Door 2 selection signal" is active ,
the back door opens upon arrival for car
calls.
Method 2: using DI with function 46
"Single/Double door selection" (F6-64
Bit4 = 0)
A. DI inactive (sing door control): same
as method 1
B. DI active (double door control): same
as mode 2
≤ 4 (standard)
≤ 8 (after extension)
Mode 4:
Fb-01 = 3
Hall call
independent,
car call
independent
The corresponding door opens upon
arrival for halls call and car calls from this
door.
≤ 4 (standard)
≤ 8 (after extension)
Note
• In the fire emergency and elevator lock state, the opposite door is under simultaneous control
rather than independent control.
• In any mode, if the door machine controller does not work at a certain floor , the door does not
open after arrival of the elevator.
• In any mode, if the door machine controllers of both the front and back doors work but "Back
door forbidden input" is active, the back door does not open.
• In any mode, when any door close button input in the car is active, both the front door and back
door close.
• "Single/Double door selection input" is valid only in mode 3, and the elevator is in double door
service state. Otherwise, the elevator is in single door service state.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
6
Function Code TableDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Function Code Table NICE1000new User Manual- 80 -
Chapter 6 Function Code Table
6.1 Function Code Description
1. There are a total of 17 function code groups, each of which includes several function
codes. The function codes adopt the three-level menu. The function code group number
is Level-I menu; the function code number is Level-II menu; the function code setting is
Level-III menu.
2. The meaning of each column in the function code table is as follows:
Function Code Indicates the function code number.
Parameter Name Indicates the parameter name of the function
code.
Setting Range Indicates the setting range of the parameter.
Default Indicates the default setting of the parameter at
factory.
Unit Indicates the measurement unit of the parameter.
Property Indicates whether the parameter can be modified
(including the modification conditions)
The modification property of the parameters includes three types, described as follows:
" ☆ ": The parameter can be modified when the controller is in either stop or running state.
" ★ ": The parameter cannot be modified when the controller is in the running state.
" ● ": The parameter is the actually measured value and cannot be modified.
The system automatically restricts the modification property of all parameters to prevent
mal-function.
6.2 Function Code Groups
On the operation panel, press PRG and then or , and you can view the
function code groups. The function code groups are classified as follows:
F0 Basic parameters F9 Time parameters
F1 Motor parameters FA Keypad setting parameters
F2 Vector control parameters Fb Door function parameters
F3 Running control parameters FC Protection function parameters
F4 Floor parameters Fd Communication parameters
F5 Input terminal parameters FE Elevator function parametersDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Function Code Table- 81 -
F6 Basic elevator parameters FF Factory parameters
F7 Output terminal parameters FP User parameters
F8 Enhanced function parameters Fr Leveling adjustment parameters
6.3 Function Code Table
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Group F0: Basic Parameters
F0-00 Control mode
0: Sensorless vector control
(SVC)
1: Closed-loop vector control
(CLVC)
2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F)
control
1 - ★
F0-01 Command source
selection
0: Operation panel control
1: Distance control 1 - ★
F0-02 Running speed under
operation panel control 0.050 to F0-04 0.050 m/s ☆
F0-03 Maximum running
speed 0.250 to F0-04 0.480 m/s ★
F0-04 Rated elevator speed 0.200–1.750 0.500 m/s ★
F0-05 Maximum frequency F1-04 to 99.00 50.00 Hz ★
F0-06 Carrier frequency 0.5–16.0 6.0 kHz ★
Group F1: Motor Parameters
F1-00 Encoder type
0: SIN/COS encoder, absolute
encoder
1: UVW encoder
2: AB incremental encoder
(for asynchronous motor)
0 - ★
F1-01 Rated motor power 0.7–75.0 Model
dependent kW ★
F1-02 Rated motor voltage 0–440 Model
dependent In ★
F1-03 Rated motor current 0.00–655.00 Model
dependent A ★
F1-04 Rated motor frequency 0.00–99.00 Model
dependent Hz ★
F1-05 Rated motor rotational
speed 0–3000 Model
dependent RPM ★
F1-06 Encoder initial angle
(synchronous motor) 0.0–359.9 0 Degree
(°) ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Function Code Table NICE1000new User Manual- 82 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-07
Encoder angle
at power-off
(synchronous motor)
0.0–359.9 0 Degree
(°) ★
F1-08 Synchronous motor
wiring mode 0–15 0 - ★
F1-09 Current filter time
(synchronous motor) 0–3 0 - ★
F1-10 Encoder verification
selection 0–65535 0 - ★
F1-11 Auto-tuning mode
0: No operation
1: With-load auto-tuning
2: No-load auto-tuning
3: Shaft auto-tuning 1
4: Shaft auto-tuning 2
0 - ★
F1-12 Encoder pulses per
revolution 0–10000 1024 PPR ★
F1-13 Encoder wire-breaking
detection time
0–10.0
(Detection disabled when
value smaller than 0.5s)
1.0 s ★
F1-14 Stator resistance
(asynchronous motor) 0.000–30.000 Model
dependent Oh ★
F1-15 Rotor resistance
(asynchronous motor) 0.000–30.000 Model
dependent Oh ★
F1-16 Leakage inductance
(asynchronous motor) 0.00–300.00 Model
dependent mH ★
F1-17 Mutual inductance
(asynchronous motor) 0.1–3000.0 Model
dependent mH ★
F1-18 Magnetizing current
(asynchronous motor) 0.01–300.00 Model
dependent A ★
F1-19 Shaft Q inductance
(torque) 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★
F1-20 Shaft D inductance
(excitation) 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★
F1-21 Back EMF 0–65535 0 - ★
F1-25 Motor type 0: Asynchronous motor
1: Synchronous motor 1 - ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Function Code Table- 83 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Group F2: Vector Control Parameters
F2-00 Speed loop
proportional gain KP1 0–100 40 - ★
F2-01 Speed loop integral
hour TI1 0.01–10.00 0.60 s ★
F2-02 Switchover frequency
1 0.00 to F2-05 2.00 Hz ★
F2-03 Speed loop
proportional gain KP2 0–100 35 - ★
F2-04 Speed loop integral
time TI2 0.01–10.00 0.80 s ★
F2-05 Switchover frequency
2 F2-02 to F0-05 5.00 Hz ★
F2-06 Current loop KP1
(torque) 10–500 60 % ★
F2-07 Current loop KI1
(torque) 10–500 30 % ★
F2-08 Torque upper limit 0.0–200.0 150.0 % ★
F2-10 Elevator running
direction
0: Direction unchanged
1: Direction reversed 0 - ★
F2-11 Zero servo current
coefficient 0.20–50.0 15 % ★
F2-12 Zero servo speed loop
KP 0.00–2.00 0.5 - ★
F2-13 Zero servo speed loop
TO 0.00–2.00 0.6 - ★
F2-16 Torque acceleration
time 1–500 1 ms ★
F2-17 Torque deceleration
time 1–500 350 ms ★
F2-18 Startup acceleration
time 0.000–1.500 0.000 s ★
Group F3: Running Control Parameter
F3-00 Startup speed 0.000–0.030 0.000 m/s ★
F3-01 Startup holding time 0.000–0.500 0.000 s ★
F3-02 Acceleration rate 0.200–0.800 0.300 m/s2 ★
F3-03 Acceleration start jerk
time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★
F3-04 Acceleration end jerk
time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Function Code Table NICE1000new User Manual- 84 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-05 Deceleration rate 0.200–0.800 0.300 m/s2 ★
F3-06 Deceleration end jerk
time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★
F3-07 Deceleration start jerk
time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★
F3-08 Special deceleration
rate 0.200–2.000 0.500 m/s2 ★
F3-09 Pre-deceleration
distance 0–90.0 0.0 mm ★
F3-10 Re-leveling speed 0.000–0.080 0.040 m/s ★
F3-11 Inspection speed 0.100–0.500 0.250 m/s ★
F3-12 Position of up slow-
down 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
F3-13 Position of down slow-
down 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
F3-14 Zero-speed control
time at startup 0.000–1.000 0.200 s ★
F3-15 Brake release delay 0.000–2.000 0.600 s ★
F3-16 Zero-speed control
time at end 0.000–1.000 0.300 s ★
F3-17 Low-speed re-leveling
speed 0.080 to F3-11 0.100 m/s ★
F3-18 Acceleration rate at
emergency evacuation 0.100–1.300 0.300 m/s2 ★
Group F4: Floor Parameters
F4-00 Leveling adjustment 0–60 30 mm ★
F4-01 Current floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
F4-02 High byte of current
floor position 0–65535 1 Pulses ●
F4-03 Low byte of current
floor position 0–65535 34464 Pulses ●
F4-04 Length 1 of leveling
plate 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-05 Length 2 of leveling
plate 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-06 High byte of floor
height 1 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-07 Low byte of floor height
1 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-08 High byte of floor
height 2 0–65535 0 Pulses ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Function Code Table- 85 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F4-09 Low byte of floor height
2 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-10 High byte of floor
height 3 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-11 Low byte of floor height
3 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-12 High byte of floor
height 4 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-13 Low byte of floor height
4 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-14 High byte of floor
height 5 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-15 Low byte of floor height
5 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-16 High byte of floor
height 6 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-17 Low byte of floor height
6 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-18 High byte of floor
height 7 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-19 Low byte of floor height
7 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-20 High byte of floor
height 8 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-21 Low byte of floor height
8 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-22 High byte of floor
height 9 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-23 Low byte of floor height
9 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-24 High byte of floor
height 10 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-25 Low byte of floor height
10 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-26 High byte of floor
height 11 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-27 Low byte of floor height
11 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-28 High byte of floor
height 12 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-29 Low byte of floor height
12 0–65535 0 Pulses ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Function Code Table NICE1000new User Manual- 86 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F4-30 High byte of floor
height 13 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-31 Low byte of floor height
13 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-32 High byte of floor
height 14 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-33 Low byte of floor height
14 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-34 High byte of floor
height 15 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-35 Low byte of floor height
15 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
Group F5: Input Terminal Parameters
F5-00 Attendant/Automatic
switchover time 3–200 3 s ★
F5-01 X1 function selection
1–99: NO input, 101–199: NC
input
00: Invalid
01: Leveling 1 signal
02: Leveling 2 signal
03: Door zone signal
04: RUN contactor feedback
signal
05: Brake travel switch
feedback signal 1
06: Brake travel switch
feedback signal 1
07: Shorting PMSM stator
contactor feedback signal
08: Shorting door lock circuit
contactor feedback
09: Inspection signal
10: Inspection up signal
11: Inspection down signal
12: First fire emergency
signal
(To be continued)
03 - ★
F5-02 X2 function selection 104 - ★
F5-03 X3 function selection 105 - ★
F5-04 X4 function selection 109 - ★
F5-05 X5 function selection 10 - ★
F5-06 X6 function selection 11 - ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Function Code Table- 87 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-07 X7 function selection
13: Reserved
14: Elevator lock signal
15: Up limit signal
16: Down limit signal
17: Up slow-down signal
18: Down slow-down signal
19: Overload signal
20: Full-load signal
21: Emergency stop (safety
feedback) signal
22: Door 1 open limit signal
23: Door 2 open limit signal
24: Door 1 close limit signal
25: Door 2 close limit signal
26: Door machine 1 light
curtain signal
27: Door machine 2 light
curtain signal
28: Attendant signal
29: Direct travel ride signal
30: Direction change signal
31: Independent running
signal
31: Door 2 selection signal
33: UPS valid signal
34: Door open button
35: Door close button
36: Safety circuit
37: Door lock circuit 1
38: Door lock circuit 2
39: Half-load signal
40: Motor overheat signal
41: Door machine 1 safety
edge signal
42: Door machine 2 safety
edge signal
43: Earthquake signal
44: Back door forbidden
signal
(To be continued)
12 - ★
F5-08 X8 function selection 14 - ★
F5-09 X9 function selection 115 - ★
F5-10 X10 function selection 116 - ★
F5-11 X11 function selection 117 - ★
F5-12 X12 function selection 118 - ★
F5-13 X13 function selection 119 - ★
F5-14 X14 function selection 22 - ★
F5-15 X15 function selection 126 - ★
F5-16 X16 function selection 28 - ★
F5-17 X17 function selection 30 - ★
F5-18 X18 function selection 124 - ★
F5-19 X19 function selection 00 - ★
F5-20 X20 function selection 00 - ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Function Code Table NICE1000new User Manual- 88 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-21 X21 function selection
45: Light-load signal
46: Single/Double door
selection
47: Fire emergency floor
switchover signal
48: Virtual floor input
49: Firefighter switch signal
50: Brake travel switch
feedback signal 1
51–99: Reserved
(End)
00 - ★
F5-22 X22 function selection 00 - ★
F5-23 X23 function selection 00 - ★
F5-24 X24 function selection 00 - ★
F5-25 X25 higher-voltage
input function selection
00–99
01 - ★
F5-26 X26 higher-voltage
input function selection 02 - ★
F5-27 X27 higher-voltage
input function selection 03 - ★
F5-28 Terminal state display
1 - - - ●
F5-29 Terminal state display
2 - - - ●
F5-30 Floor I/O terminal state
display 1 - - - ●
F5-31 Floor I/O button state
display 2 - - - ●
Group F6: Basic Elevator Parameters
F6-00 Top floor of the elevator F6-01 to 16 5 - ★
F6-01 Bottom floor of the
elevator 1 to F6-00 1 - ★
F6-02 Parking floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
F6-03 Fire emergency floor 1 F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
F6-04 Elevator lock floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
F6-05 Service floors
0–65535
0: Not respond
1: Respond
65535 - ★
F6-06 Elevator function
control 1 0–65535 0 - ★
F6-07 Elevator function
control 2 0–65535 0 - ★
F6-08 Arrow blinking interval 0–5.0 1 - ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Function Code Table- 89 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-09 Random test times 0–60000 0 - ★
F6-10 Test function selection
Bit0: Hall call forbidden
Bit1: Door open forbidden
Bit2: Overload forbidden
Bit3: Limit forbidden
0 - ★
F6-11 L1 function selection
00: Invalid
200–399
201 - ★
F6-12 L2 function selection 202 - ★
F6-13 L3 function selection 203 - ★
F6-14 L4 function selection 00 - ★
F6-15 L5 function selection 211 - ★
F6-16 L6 function selection 212 - ★
F6-17 L7 function selection 213 - ★
F6-18 L8 function selection 214 - ★
F6-19 L9 function selection 215 - ★
F6-20 L10 function selection 00 - ★
F6-21 L11 function selection 00 - ★
F6-22 L12 function selection 00 - ★
F6-23 L13 function selection 231 - ★
F6-24 L14 function selection 232 - ★
F6-25 L15 function selection 233 - ★
F6-26 L16 function selection 234 - ★
F6-27 L17 function selection 252 - ★
F6-28 L18 function selection 253 - ★
F6-29 L19 function selection 254 - ★
F6-30 L20 function selection 255 - ★
F6-31 L21 function selection 00 - ★
F6-32 L22 function selection 00 - ★
F6-33 L23 function selection 00 - ★
F6-34 L24 function selection 00 - ★
F6-35 L25 function selection 00 - ★
F6-36 L26 function selection 00 - ★
F6-37 L27 function selection 00 - ★
F6-38 L28 function selection 00 - ★
F6-39 L29 function selection 00 - ★
F6-40 L30 function selection 00 - ★
F6-41 L31 function selection 00 - ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Function Code Table NICE1000new User Manual- 90 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-42 L32 function selection
00: Invalid
200–399
00 - ★
F6-43 L33 function selection 00 - ★
F6-44 L34 function selection 00 - ★
F6-45 L35 function selection 00 - ★
F6-46 L36 function selection 00 - ★
F6-47 L37 function selection 00 - ★
F6-48 L38 function selection 00 - ★
F6-49 L39 function selection 00 - ★
F6-50 L40 function selection 00 - ★
F6-51 L41 function selection 00 - ★
F6-52 L42 function selection 00 - ★
F6-53 L43 function selection 00 - ★
F6-54 L44 function selection 00 - ★
F6-55 L45 function selection 00 - ★
F6-56 L46 function selection 00 - ★
F6-57 L47 function selection 00 - ★
F6-58 L48 function selection 00 - ★
F6-59 L49 function selection 00 - ★
F6-60 L50 function selection 00 - ★
F6-61 Leveling sensor delay 10–50 14 ms ★
F6-62 Time interval of random
running 0–1000 3 s ☆
F6-63 Reserved - - - -
F6-64 Program control
selection 1 0–65535 0 - ★
F6-65 Program control
selection 2 0–65535 0 - ★
F6-66 Program control
selection 3 0–65535 0 - ★
F6-67 Attendant function
selection 0–65535 128 - ★
F6-68 Fire emergency
function selection 0–65535 16456 - ★
F6-69 Emergency evacuation
function selection 0–65535 0 - ★
F6-71 Reserved - - - -Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Function Code Table- 91 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-72 Emergency evacuation
switching speed 0.010–0.630 0.010 m/s ★
F6-73 Evacuation parking
floor 0 to F6-00 0 - ★
F6-74 Blinking advance time 0.0–15.0 1 s ☆
F6-75
Waiting time for
switchover from
shorting stator braking
mode to controller
drive
0.0–45.0 20.0 s ☆
Group F7: Output Terminal Parameters
F7-00 Y0 function selection
Y0 designated for function
32 "emergency evacuation at
power failure"
Range: 00–05 or 32
00: Invalid
01: RUN contactor output
02: Brake contactor control
03: Higher-voltage startup of
brake
04: Lamp/Fan running
05: Shorting PMSM stator
contactor
00 - ★
F7-01 Y1 function selection 01 - ★
F7-02 Y2 function selection 02 - ★
F7-03 Y3 function selection 04 - ★
F7-04 Y4 function selection 06–99
00: Invalid
06: Door 1 open output
07: Door 1 close output
08: Door 2 open output
09: Door 2 close output
10: Low 7-segment a display
output
11: Low 7-segment b display
output
12: Low 7-segment c display
output
13: Low 7-segment d display
output
(To be continued)
00 - ★
F7-05 Y5 function selection 00 - ★
F7-06 Y6 function selection 06 - ★
F7-07 Y7 function selection 07 - ★
F7-08 Y8 function selection 08 - ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Function Code Table NICE1000new User Manual- 92 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F7-09 Y9 function selection
14: Low 7-segment e display
output
15: Low 7-segment f display
output
16: Low 7-segment g display
output
17: Up arrow display output
18: Down arrow output
19: Minus sign display output
20: Returning to base floor at
fire emergency
21: Buzzer output
22: Overload output
23: Arrival gong output
24: Full-load output
25: Inspection output
26: Fan/Lamp output 2
27: Shorting door lock circuit
contactor output
28: BCD/Gray code/7-
segment high-bit output
29: Controller normal running
output
30: Electric lock output
31: Reserved
32: Emergency evacuation at
power failure
33: Forced door close 1
34: Forced door close 2
35: Faulty state
36: Up signal
37: Medical sterilization
output
38: Non-door zone stop
output
39: Non-service state output
40: Reserved
41: High 7-segment a display
output
42: High 7-segment b display
output
(To be continued)
09 - ★
F7-10 Y10 function selection 10 - ★
F7-11 Y11 function selection 11 - ★
F7-12 Y12 function selection 12 - ★
F7-13 Y13 function selection 13 - ★
F7-14 Y14 function selection 00 - ★
F7-15 Y15 function selection 00 - ★
F7-16 Y16 function selection 25 - ★
F7-17 Y17 function selection 17 - ★
F7-18 Y18 function selection 18 - ★
F7-19 Y19 function selection 19 - ★
F7-20 Y20 function selection 20 - ★
F7-21 Y21 function selection 21 - ★
F7-22 Y22 function selection 22 - ★
F7-23 Y23 function selection 00 - ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Function Code Table- 93 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F7-24 Y24 function selection
43: High 7-segment c display
output
44: High 7-segment d display
output
45: High 7-segment e display
output
46: High 7-segment f display
output
47: High 7-segment g display
output
48–99: Reserved
(End)
00 - ★
F7-25 Y25 function selection 00 - ★
F7-26 Y26 function selection 00 - ★
F7-27 Y27 function selection 00 - ★
Group F8: Enhanced Function Parameters
F8-00 Load for load cell auto-
tuning 0–100 0 % ★
F8-01 Pre-torque selection
0: Pre-torque invalid
1: Load cell pre-torque
compensation
2: Automatic pre-torque
compensation
0 - ★
F8-02 Pre-torque offset 0.0–100.0 50.0 % ★
F8-03 Drive gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★
F8-04 Brake gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★
F8-05 Current car load 0–255 0 - ●
F8-06 Car no-load load 0–255 0 - ★
F8-07 Car full-load load 0–255 100 - ★
F8-08 Load cell input
selection
0: MCB digital sampling
1: MCB analog sampling 0 - ☆
F8-09
Emergency evacuation
operation speed at
power failure
0.000 to F3-11 0.050 m/s ★
F8-10
Emergency evacuation
operation mode at
power failure
0: Motor not running
1: UPS
2: 48 V battery power supply
0 - ★
F8-11 Brake apply delay 0.200–1.500 0.200 s ★
F8-12 Fire emergency floor 2 0 to F6-00 0 - ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Function Code Table NICE1000new User Manual- 94 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-13 Anti-nuisance function
Bit0: Disabled
Bit1: Judged by light curtain
Bit 2: Judged by light-load
signal
0 - ☆
Group F9: Time Parameters
F9-00 Idle time before
returning to base floor
1–240
0: Invalid 10 min ☆
F9-01 Time for fan and lamp
to be turned off
1–240
0: Fan and lamp always ON 2 min ☆
F9-02 Motor running time limit 0–45
Invalid if smaller than 3s 45 s ★
F9-03 Accumulative running
time 0–65535 0 h ●
F9-04 Reserved - - -
F9-05 High byte of running
times
0–9999
1 indicating actual running
times 10000
0 - ●
F9-06 Low byte or running
times 0–9999 0 - ●
Group FA: Keypad Setting Parameters
FA-00 Reserved - - -
FA-01 Display in running state 1–65535 65535 - ☆
FA-02 Display in stop state 1–65535 65535 - ☆
FA-03 Current encoder angle 0.0–359.9 0.0 Degree
(°) ●
FA-04 Reserved - - - -
FA-05 Control board software
(ZK) 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-06 Drive board software
(DSP) 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-06 Heatsink temperature 0–100 0 °C ●
FA-08 Controller model - 1000 - ●
FA-09 Reserved - - - -
FA-10 Reserved - - - -
FA-11 Pre-torque current 0.0–200.0 0 % ●
FA-12 Logic information 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-13 Curve information 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-14 Set speed 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Function Code Table- 95 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-15 Feedback speed 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●
FA-16 Bus voltage 0–999.9 0 In ●
FA-17 Present position 0.00–300.0 0 m ●
FA-18 Output current 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
FA-19 Output frequency 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ●
FA-20 Torque current 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
FA-21 Output voltage 0–999.9 0 In ●
FA-22 Output torque 0–200.0 0 % ●
FA-23 Output power 0.00–99.99 0 kW ●
FA-24 Communication
interference 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-25 Encoder interference 0–65535 0 -
FA-26 Input state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-27 Input state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-28 Input state 3 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-29 Input state 4 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-30 Input state 5 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-31 Output state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-32 Output state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-33 Output state 3 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-34 Floor I/O state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-35 Floor I/O state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-36 Floor I/O state 3 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-37 Floor I/O state 4 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-38 Floor I/O state 5 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-39 Floor I/O state 6 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-40 Floor I/O state 7 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-41 System state 0–65535 0 - ★
Group Fb: Door Function Parameters
Fb-00 Number of door
machine(s) 1–2 1 - ★
Fb-01 Opposite door control
mode 0–3 0 - ●Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Function Code Table NICE1000new User Manual- 96 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-02 Service floors of door
machine 1
0–65535
0: Forbid door open
1: Allow door open
65535 - ☆
Fb-03 Holding time of manual
door open 1–60 10 s ☆
Fb-04 Service floors of door
machine 2
0–65535
0: Forbid door open
1: Allow door open
Valid only when there are two
door machines
65535 - ☆
Fb-05 Delay at stop after
re-leveling 0.00–2.00 0 s ★
Fb-06 Door open protection
time 5–99 10 s ☆
Fb-07 Program control
selection
0–65535
Bit0–Bit4: Reserved
Bit5: Synchronous motor
current detection
Bit6–Bit12: Reserved
Bit13: Higher voltage/Lower
voltage 1.5s detection
0 - ☆
Fb-08 Door close protection
time 5–99 15 s ☆
Fb-09 Door open/close
protection times
0–20
0: Invalid 0 - ☆
Fb-10 Door state of standby
elevator
0: Closing the door as normal
at base floor
1: Waiting with door open at
base floor
2: Waiting with door open at
each floor
0 - ☆
Fb-11 Door open holding time
for hall call 1–1000 5 s ☆
Fb-12 Door open holding time
for car call 1–1000 3 s ☆
Fb-13 Door open holding time
upon open delay valid 10–1000 30 s ☆
Fb-14 Door open holding time
at base floor 1–1000 10 s ☆
Fb-15 Arrival gong output
delay 0–1000 0 ms ☆Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Function Code Table- 97 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-16 Door lock waiting time
at manual door 0–50 0 s ☆
Fb-17 Holding time for forced
door close 5–180 120 s ☆
Group FC: Protection Function Parameters
FC-00 Program control for
protection function
0–65535
Bit0: Short-circuit to ground
detection at power-on
Bit1: Canceling current
detection at inspection startup
Bit2: Decelerating to stop at
valid light curtain
Bit3: Password ineffective
if no operation within 30
minutes
Bit4–Bit9: Reserved
0 - ★
FC-01 Program control 2 for
protection function
0–65535
Bit0: Overload protection
Bit1: Canceling protection at
output phase loss
Bit2: Canceling over-
modulation
Bit3: Reserved
Bit4: Light curtain judgment at
door close limit
Bit5: Canceling SPI
communication judgment
Bit7:Reserved
Bit8:Reserved
Bit9: Canceling Err55 alarm
Bit10–Bit13: Reserved
Bit14: Canceling protection at
input phase loss
1 - ★
FC-02 Overload protection
coefficient 0.50–10.00 1.00 - ★
FC-03 Overload pre-warning
coefficient 50–100 80 % ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Function Code Table NICE1000new User Manual- 98 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-04 Designated fault
0–9999
High two digits indicate the
floor number and low two
digits indicate the fault code.
For example, if Err30 occurs
at floor 1, "0130" is displayed.
0: No fault
1: Reserved
2: Err02 (Over-current during
acceleration)
3: Err03 (Over-current during
deceleration)
4: Err04 (Over-current at
constant speed)
5: Err05 (Over-voltage during
acceleration)
6: Err06 (Over-voltage during
deceleration)
7: Err07 (Overvoltage at
constant speed)
8: Reserved
9: Err09 (Undervoltage)
10: Err10 (Controller
overload)
11: Err11 (Motor overload)
12: Err12 (Power supply
phase loss)
13: Err13 (Power output
phase loss)
14: Err14 (Module overheat)
15: Err15 (Output abnormal)
16: Err16 (Current control
fault)
17: Err17 (Reference signal
of the encoder incorrect)
18: Err18 (Current detection
fault)
19: Err19 (Motor auto-tuning
fault)
(To be continued)
0 - ●Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Function Code Table- 99 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-04 Designated fault
20: Err20 (Speed feedback
incorrect)
21: Reserved
22: Err22 (Leveling signal
abnormal)
23: Reserved
24: Err24 (RTC clock fault)
25: Err25 (Storage data
abnormal)
26: Err26 (Earthquake signal)
27, 28: Reserved
29: Err29 (Shorting PMSM
stator feedback abnormal)
30: Err30 (Elevator position
abnormal)
33: Err33 (Elevator speed
abnormal)
34: Err34 (Logic fault)
35: Err35 (Shaft auto-tuning
data abnormal)
36: Err36 (RUN contactor
feedback abnormal)
37: Err37 (Brake contactor
feedback abnormal)
38: Err38 (Encoder signal
abnormal)
39: Err39 (Motor overheat)
40: Err40 (Elevator running
reached)
41: Err41 (Safety circuit
disconnected)
42: Err42 (Door lock
disconnected during running)
43: Err43 (Up limit signal
abnormal)
44: Err44 (Down limit signal
abnormal)
45: Err45 (Slow-down switch
position abnormal)
(To be continued)
0 - ●Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Function Code Table NICE1000new User Manual- 100 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-04 Designated fault
46: Err46 (Re-leveling
abnormal)
47: Err47 (Shorting door lock
circuit contactor abnormal)
48: Err48 (Door open fault)
49: Err49 (Door close fault)
50: Consecutive loss of
leveling signal
53: Err53 (Door lock fault)
54: Err54 (Overcurrent at
inspection startup)
55: Err55 (Stop at another
landing floor)
57: Err57 (SPI communication
abnormal)
58: Err58 (Shaft position
switches abnormal)
62: Err62 (Analog input cable
broken)
(End)
0 - ●
FC-05 Designated fault code
(display) 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-06 Designated fault
subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-07 Logic information of
designated fault 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-08 Curve information of
designated fault 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-09 Set speed upon
designated fault 0.000–1.750 0 m/s ●
FC-10 Feedback speed upon
designated fault 0.000–1.750 0 m/s ●
FC-11 Bus voltage upon
designated fault 0.0–999.9 0 V ●
FC-12 Current position upon
designated fault 0.0–300.0 0 m ●
FC-13 Output current upon
designated fault 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
FC-14 Output frequency upon
designated fault 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ●
FC-15 Torque current upon
designated fault 0.0–999.9 0 A ●Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Function Code Table- 101 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-16 1st fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-17 1st fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-18 2nd fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-19 2nd fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-20 3rd fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-21 3rd fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-22 4th fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-23 4th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-24 5th fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-25 5th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-26 6th fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-27 6th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-28 7th fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-29 7th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-30 8th fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-31 8th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-32 9th fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-33 9th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-34 10th fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-35 10th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-36 Latest fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-37 Latest fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-38 Logic information of
latest fault 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-39 Curve information of
latest fault 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-40 Set speed upon latest
fault 0.000–1.750 0 m/s ●
FC-41 Feedback speed upon
latest fault 0.000–1.750 0 m/s ●
FC-42 Bus voltage upon latest
fault 0.0–999.9 0 V ●
FC-43 Current position upon
latest fault 0.0–300.0 0 m ●
FC-44 Output current upon
latest fault 0–999.9 0 A ●
FC-45 Output frequency upon
latest fault 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ●Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Function Code Table NICE1000new User Manual- 102 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-46 Torque current upon
latest fault 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
Group Fd: Communication Parameters
Fd-00 Local address 0–127
0: Broadcast address 1 - ★
Fd-01 Communication
response delay 0–20 10 ms ★
Fd-02 Communication
timeout
0.0–60.0
0: Invalid 0.0 s ★
Fd-03 Number of elevators in
parallel control mode 1–2 1 - ★
Fd-04 Elevator No. 1–2 1 - ★
Fd-05 Parallel control function
selection Bit0: Dispersed waiting 1 - ★
Group FE: Elevator Function Parameters
FE-00 Collective selective
mode
0: Full collective selective
1: Down collective selective
2: Up collective selective
0 - ☆
FE-01 Floor 1 display
0000–1999
The two high digits indicate
the display code of the ten's
digit, and the two low digits
indicate the display code of
the unit's digit.
00: Display "0"
01: Display "1"
02: Display "2"
03: Display "3"
04: Display "4"
05: Display "5"
06: Display "6"
07: Display "7"
08: Display "8"
09: Display "9"
10: Display "A"
11: Reserved
12: Reserved
(To be continued)
1901 - ☆
FE-02 Floor 2 display 1902 - ☆
FE-03 Floor 3 display 1903 - ☆
FE-04 Floor 4 display 1904 - ☆
FE-05 Floor 5 display 1905 - ☆
FE-06 Floor 6 display 1906 - ☆Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Function Code Table- 103 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FE-07 Floor 7 display
13: Display "H"
14: Display "L"
15: Reserved
16: Display "P"
17: Reserved
18: Display "-"
19: No display
23: Display "C"
24: Display "d"
25: Display "E"
26: Display "F"
28: Display "J"
31: Display "o"
35: Display "U"
Larger than 35: No display
(End)
1907 - ☆
FE-08 Floor 8 display 1908 - ☆
FE-09 Floor 9 display 1909 - ☆
FE-10 Floor 10 display 0100 - ☆
FE-11 Floor 11 display 0101 - ☆
FE-12 Hall call output
selection
0: 7-segment code
1: BCD code
2: Gray code
3: Binary code
4: One-to-one output
1 - ☆Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Function Code Table NICE1000new User Manual- 104 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FE-13 Elevator function
selection 1
0–65535
If the bit is set to 1, the
function expressed is
enabled.
Bit0: Reserved
Bit1: Reserved
Bit2: Re-leveling function
Bit3: Door pre-open function
Bit4: Reserved
Bit5: Forced door close
Bit6: Door open valid at non-
door zone in the inspection
state
Bit7: Door open and close
once after inspection turned
to normal
Bit8: Reserved
Bit9: Independent running
Bit10: Reserved
Bit11: Door re-open after car
call of the present floor
Bit12–Bit15: Reserved
0 - ☆
FE-14 Elevator function
selection 2
0–65535
If the bit is set to 1, the
function expressed is
enabled.
Bit0: Reserved
Bit1: Door open holding at
open limit
Bit2: Door close command
not output upon door close
limit
Bit3: Manual door
Bit4: Auto reset for RUN and
brake contactor stuck
Bit5: Slow-down switch stuck
detection
Bit6–Bit9: Reserved
Bit10: NO/NC output selection
of shorting PMSM stator
contactor
Bit11: Reserved
Bit12: Fan/Lamp output
Bit13–Bit15: Reserved
0 - ☆Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Function Code Table- 105 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FE-15 Floor 12 display
Same as FE-01 to FE-11
0102 - ☆
FE-16 Floor 13 display 0103 - ☆
FE-17 Floor 14 display 0104 - ☆
FE-18 Floor 15 display 0105 - ☆
FE-19 Floor 16 display 0106 - ☆
Fr: Leveling Adjustment Parameters
Fr-00 Leveling adjustment
function
0: Disabled
1: Enabled 0 mm ★
Fr-01 Leveling adjustment
record 1 00000–60060 30030 mm ★
Fr-02 Leveling adjustment
record 2 00000–60060 30030 mm ★
Fr-03 Leveling adjustment
record 3 00000–60060 30030 mm ★
Fr-04 Leveling adjustment
record 4 00000–60060 30030 mm ★
Fr-05 Leveling adjustment
record 5 00000–60060 30030 mm ★
Fr-06 Leveling adjustment
record 6 00000–60060 30030 mm ★
Fr-07 Leveling adjustment
record 7 00000–60060 30030 mm ★
Fr-08 Leveling adjustment
record 8 00000–60060 30030 mm ★
Group FP: User Parameters
FP-00 User password 0–65535
00000: no password 0 - ☆
FP-01 Parameter update
0: No operation
1: Restore default settings
2: Clear fault records
0 - ★
FP-02 User-defined
parameter display
0: Invalid
1: Valid 0 - ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Function Code Table NICE1000new User Manual- 106 -Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
7
Description of Function CodesDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 108 -
Chapter 7 Description of Function Codes
The modification property of the parameters includes three types, described as follows:
" ☆ ": The parameter can be modified when the controller is in either stop or running state.
" ★ ": The parameter cannot be modified when the controller is in the running state.
"●": The parameter is the actually measured value and cannot be modified.
The system automatically restricts the modification property of all parameters to prevent
mal-function.
Group F0: Basic Parameters
Function
Code
Parameter
Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F0-00 Control
mode
• 0: Sensorless vector control
(SVC)
• 1: Closed-loop vector control
(CLVC)
• 2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F)
control
1 - ★
It is used to set the control mode of the system.
• 0: Sensorless vector control (SVC)
It is applicable to low-speed running during no-load commissioning of the asynchronous
motor, fault judgment at inspection, and synchronous motor running on special conditions.
• 1: Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
It is applicable to normal running in distance control.
• 2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
It is applicable to equipment detection where the ratio between the voltage and the
frequency is fixed, control is simple, and the low-frequency output torque feature is poor.
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F0-01 Command source
selection
0: Operation panel control
1: Distance control 1 - ★
It is used to set the source of running commands and running speed references.
• 0: Operation panel control
The controller is operated by pressing RUN and STOP
RES on the operation panel, and
the running speed is set by F0-02 (Running speed under operation panel control). This
method is applicable only to the test or motor no-load auto-tuning.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 109 -
• 1: Distance control
This method is used in the NICE series integrated elevator controller. During inspection,
the elevator runs at the speed set in F3-11 (Inspection speed). During normal running, the
controller automatically calculates the speed and running curve for the elevator based on
the distance between the current floor and the target floor within the rated elevator speed,
implementing direct travel ride.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F0-02 Running speed under
operation panel control 0.050 to F0-04 0.050 m/s ☆
It is used to set the running speed in the operation panel control mode.
Note that this function is enabled only when F0-01 is set to 0 (Operation panel control). You
can change the running speed of the elevator by modifying this parameter during running
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F0-03 Maximum running speed 0.200 to F0-04 0.480 m/s ★
It is used to set the actual maximum running speed of the elevator. The value must be
smaller than the rated elevator speed.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F0-04 Rated elevator speed 0.200–1.750 0.500 m/s ★
It is used to set the norminal rated speed of the elevator. The value of this parameter is
dependent on the elevator mechanism and traction motor.
Note
F0-03 is the actual running speed within the elevator speed range set in F0-04. For example, for a
certain elevator, if F0-04 is 1.750 m/s and the actually required maximum running speed is 1.600
m/s, set F0-03 to 1.600 m/s.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F0-05 Maximum frequency F1-04 to 99.00 50.00 Hz ★
It is used to set the maximum output frequency of the system. This value must be larger
than the rated motor frequency.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F0-06 Carrier frequency 0.5–16.0 6.0 kHz ★
It is used to set the carrier frequency of the controller.
The carrier frequency is closely related to the motor noise during running. When it is
generally set above 6 kHz, mute running is achieved. It is recommended to set the carrier
frequency to the lowest within the allowable noise, which reduces the controller loss and
radio frequency interference.
• If the carrier frequency is low, output current has high harmonics, and the power loss andDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 110 -
temperature rise of the motor increase.
• If the carrier frequency is high, power loss and temperature rise of the motor declines.
However, the system has an increase in power loss, temperature rise and interference.
Adjusting the carrier frequency will exert influences on the aspects listed in the following
table.
Table 7-1 Influences of carrier frequency adjustment
Carrier frequency Low High
Motor noise Large Small
Output current waveform Bad Good
Motor temperature rise High Low
Controller temperature rise Low High
Leakage current Small Large
External radiation interference Small Large
Note
On certain environment conditions (the heatsink temperature is too high), the system will reduce
the carrier frequency to provide overheat protection for the controller, preventing the controller
from being damaged due to overheat. If the temperature cannot reduce in this case, the controller
reports the overheat fault.
Group F1: Motor Parameter
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-00 Encoder type
0: SIN/COS encoder,
absolute encoder
1: UVW encoder
2: AB incremental encoder
(for asynchronous motor)
0 - ★
It is used to set the encoder type matching the motor.
When F1-25 is set to 1 (Synchronous motor), this parameter is automatically changed to 0.
If the actually used is UVW encoder, manually set this parameter to 1 before auto-tuning.
Otherwise, the system fails to run.
When F1-25 is set to 0 (Asynchronous motor), this parameter is automatically changed to 2.
You need not modify it manually.
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-01 Rated motor power 0.7–75.0 Model
dependent kW ★
F1-02 Rated motor voltage 0–440 Model
dependent V ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 111 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-03 Rated motor current 0.00–655.00 Model
dependent A ★
F1-04 Rated motor
frequency 0.00–99.00 Model
dependent Hz ★
F1-05 Rated motor rotational
speed 0–3000 Model
dependent RPM ★
Set these parameters according to the motor nameplate.
Ensure that these motor parameters are set correctly. Incorrect setting affects the motor
auto-tuning and the vector control effect.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-06 Encoder initial angle
(synchronous motor) 0.0–359.9 0 Degree
(°) ★
F1-07 Encoder angle at power-
off (synchronous motor) 0.0–359.9 0 Degree
(°) ★
F1-08 Synchronous motor
wiring mode 0–15 0 - ★
These parameters are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning.
F1-06 specifies the encoder angle at zero point. After multiple times of auto-tuning, compare
the obtained values, and the value deviation of F1-06 shall be within ±5°.
F1-07 specifies the angle of the magnetic pole when the motor is powered off. The value is
recorded at power-off and is used for comparison at next power-on.
F1-08 specifies the motor wiring mode, that is, whether the output phase sequence of the
drive board is consistent with the UVW phase sequence of the motor. If the value obtained
by means of no-load auto-tuning is an even number, the phase sequence is correct. If the
value is an odd number, the sequence is incorrect; in this case, exchange any two of UWW
phases of the motor.
Note
With-load auto-tuning of the synchronous motor can be performed only when the UVW phase
sequence of the motor is consistent with the output phase sequence of the controller.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-09 Current filter time
(synchronous motor) 0–3 0 - ★
It is used to set the current filter time, which suppress the periodic vertical jitter. Increase the
value in ascending order of 0.5 to achieve the optimum effect.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-10 Encoder verification selection 0–65535 0 - ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 112 -
It is used to set encoder signal verification. This parameter is set by the manufacturer, and
you need not modify it generally.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-11 Auto-tuning mode
0: No operation
1: With-load auto-tuning
2: No-load auto-tuning
3: Shaft auto-tuning 1
4: Shaft auto-tuning 2
0 - ★
It is used to select the auto-tuning mode.
1: With-load auto-tuning
It is static auto-tuning for the asynchronous motor (the motor does not rotate) and rotary
auto-tuning for the synchronous motor (the brake is released and the motor rotates).
2: No-load auto-tuning
The motor must be completely disconnected from the load; otherwise, the auto-tuning effect
will be affected. When "TUNE" is displayed on the operation panel, you need to manually
release the brake before starting auto-tuning.
3: Shaft auto-tuning 1 4: Shaft auto-tuning 2
These two modes are similar, except that shaft auto-tuning 1 reserves the leveling
adjustment records in group Fr, and shaft auto-tuning 2 clears these records.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-12 Encoder pulses per revolution 0–10000 1024 PPR ★
It is used to set the pulses per revolution of the encoder (according to the encoder
nameplate).
This parameter is critical to CLVC. Set the encoder nominal value in this parameter.
Otherwise, the elevator may not run properly. When the feedback pulses received by the
system is data after frequency division by other equipment, set the frequency-division value
rather than the encoder nominal value in this parameter. For example, if the pulses per
revolution of the encoder is 8192 and is sent to the system after 1/4 frequency division, set
this parameter to 2048 (8192/4 = 2048).
F0-04 (Rated elevator speed), F1-05 (Rated motor rotational speed), and F1-12 (Encoder
pulses per revolution) determine whether the elevator can run properly. If any of these
parameters is changed, shaft auto-tuning must be performed again.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-13 Encoder wire-breaking
detection time 0–10.0 1.0 s ★
This parameter is used to set the time that a wire-break fault lasts before being detected.
After the elevator starts running at non-zero speed, if there is no encoder signal input within
the time set in this parameter, the system prompts the encoder fault and stops running.
When the value is smaller than 0.5s, this function is disabled.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 113 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-14 Stator resistance
(asynchronous motor) 0.000–30.000 Model
dependent Ω ★
F1-15 Rotor resistance
(asynchronous motor) 0.000–30.000 Model
dependent Ω ★
F1-16 Leakage inductance
(asynchronous motor) 0.00–300.00 Model
dependent mH ★
F1-17 Mutual inductance
(asynchronous motor) 0.1–3000.0 Model
dependent mH ★
F1-18 Magnetizing current
(asynchronous motor) 0.01–300.00 Model
dependent A ★
These parameters are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning. After the motor auto-tuning
is completed successfully, the values of these parameters are updated automatically.
If motor auto-tuning cannot be performed onsite, manually enter the values by referring to
data of the motor with the same nameplate parameters.
Each time F1-01 (Rated motor power) of the asynchronous motor is modified, these
parameters automatically resume to the default values for the standard motor.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-19 Shaft Q inductance (torque) 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★
F1-20 Shaft D inductance (excitation) 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★
F1-21 Back EMF 0–65535 0 - ★
These parameters are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-25 Motor type 0: Asynchronous motor
1: Synchronous motor 1 - ★
It is used to set the motor type. This parameter must be set correctly before motor auto-
tuning; otherwise, the motor auto-tuning cannot be performed.
Group F2: Vector Control Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F2-00 Speed loop proportional gain KP1 0–100 40 - ★
F2-01 Speed loop integral time TI1 0.01–10.00 0.60 s ★
F2-02 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 to F2-05 2.00 Hz ★
F2-00 and F2-01 are PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is smaller than
the value of F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1).
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F2-03 Speed loop proportional gain KP2 0–100 35 - ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 114 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F2-04 Speed loop integral time TI2 0.01–10.00 0.80 s ★
F2-05 Switchover frequency 2 F2-02 to F0-05 5.00 Hz ★
F2-03 and F2-04 are PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is larger than the
value of F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2).
If the running frequency is between F2-02 and F2-05, the speed loop PI parameters are
obtained from the weighted average value of the two groups of PI parameters (F2-00, F2-01
and F2-03, F2-04), as shown in Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-1 Relationship between running frequencies and PI parameters
Frequency
reference (Hz)
PI
parameters
F2-00
F2-01
F2-03
F2-04
F2-02 (Switchover
frequency 1) F2-05 (Switchover
frequency 2)
The speed dynamic response characteristics in vector control can be adjusted by setting the
proportional gain and integral time of the speed regulator.
To achieve a faster system response, increase the proportional gain and reduce the integral
time. Be aware that this may lead to system oscillation.
The recommended adjustment method is as follows:
If the default setting cannot meet the requirements, make proper adjustment. Decrease
the proportional gain first to ensure that the system does not oscillate, and then reduce the
integral time to ensure that the system has quick response and small overshoot.
If both F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1) and F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2) are 0, only F2-
03 and F2-04 are valid.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F2-06 Current loop KP1 (torque) 10–500 60 % ★
F2-07 Current loop KI1 (torque) 10–500 30 % ★
These two parameters are regulation parameters for the torque axis current loop.
These parameters are used as the torque axis current regulator in vector control. The best
values of the parameters matching the motor characteristics are obtained by means of
motor auto-tuning. You need not modify them generally.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F2-08 Torque upper limit 0.0–200.0 150.0 % ★
It is used to set the torque upper limit of the motor. The value 100% corresponds to the rated
output torque of the adaptable motor.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 115 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F2-10 Elevator running direction 0–1 0 - ★
It is used to set the elevator running direction.
The values are as follows:
• 0: Direction unchanged
• 1: Direction reversed
You can modify this parameter to reverse the running direction (without changing the wiring
of the motor).
When you perform inspection running for the first time after motor auto-tuning is successful,
check whether the actual motor running direction is consistent with the inspection command
direction. If not, change the motor running direction by setting F2-10 to consistent with the
inspection command direction.
Pay attention to the setting of this parameter when restoring the default setting.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F2-11 Zero servo current coefficient 0.20–50.0 15.0 % ★
F2-12 Zero servo speed loop KP 0.00–2.00 0.5 - ★
F2-13 Zero servo speed loop KI 0.00–2.00 0.6 - ★
These parameters are used to adjust automatic pre-torque compensation in the case of no-
load-cell. The no-load-cell startup function is enabled when F8-01 is set to 2.
Decrease the values of these parameters in the case of car lurch at startup, and increase
the values in the case of rollback at startup. For details, see the description of section 5.1.5.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F2-16 Torque acceleration time 1–500 1 ms ★
F2-17 Torque deceleration time 1–500 350 ms ★
These two parameters are used to set the acceleration time and deceleration time of the
torque current.
Due to different characteristics, the motor may have an abnormal sound when the current
is withdrawn at stop. In this case, you can increase the torque deceleration time properly to
eliminate the abnormal sound.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F2-18 Startup acceleration time 0.000–1.500 0.000 s ★
It is used to set the acceleration time of the startup speed. It is used with F3-00. For details,
see Figure 7-2.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 116 -
Group F3: Running Control Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-00 Startup speed 0.000–0.030 0.000 m/s ★
F3-01 Startup holding time 0.000–0.500 0.000 s ★
These two parameters are used to set the startup speed and startup speed holding time.
For details, see Figure 7-2.
The parameters may reduce the terrace feeling at startup due to static friction between the
guide rail and the guide shoes.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-02 Acceleration rate 0.200–0.800 0.300 m/s 2 ★
F3-03 Acceleration start jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★
F3-04 Acceleration end jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★
These parameters are used to set the running curve during acceleration of the elevator.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-05 Deceleration rate 0.200–0.800 0.300 m/s 2 ★
F3-06 Deceleration end jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★
F3-07 Deceleration start jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★
These parameters are used to set the running curve during deceleration of the elevator.
• F3-02 (F3-05) is the acceleration rate (deceleration rate) in the straight-line acceleration
process (deceleration process) of the S curve.
• F3-03 (F3-07) is the time for the rate to increase from 0 to the value set in F3-02 (F3-05)
in the end jerk segment of the S curve. The larger the value is, the smoother the jerk is.
• F3-04 (F3-06) is the time for the rate to decrease from the value set in F3-02 (F3-05) to 0
in the start jerk segment of the S curve. The larger the value is, the smoother the jerk is.
Figure 7-2 Setting the running curve
t (time)
V (speed)
F3-04
F3-02
F3-03
F3-09
F3-07
F3-05
F3-06
F2-18
F3-00
F3-01Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 117 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-08 Special deceleration rate 0.200–2.000 0.500 m/s 2 ★
It is used to set the deceleration rate in elevator slow-down, inspection, and shaft auto-tuning.
This parameter is not used during normal running. It is used only when the elevator position
is abnormal or the slow-down signal is abnormal, preventing over travel top terminal or over
travel bottom terminal.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-09 Pre-deceleration distance 0–90.0 0.0 mm ★
It is used to set the pre-deceleration distance of the elevator in distance control, as shown
in Figure 7-2. This function is to eliminate the effect of encoder signal loss or leveling signal
delay.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-10 Re-leveling speed 0.000–0.080 0.040 m/s ★
is used to set the elevator speed during re-leveling.
This parameter is valid only when the pre-open module (MCTC-SCB-A) is added to
implement the re-leveling function (set in FE-13).
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-11 Inspection speed 0.100–0.500 0.250 m/s ★
It is used to set the elevator speed during inspection and shaft auto-tuning.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-12 Position of up slow-down 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
F3-13 Position of down slow-down 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
These parameters specify the positions of the slow-down switches relative to the bottom
leveling position, and the positions are automatically recorded during shaft auto-tuning. For
the installation positions of the slow-down switches, see Table 3-11.
The NICE1000 new integrated elevator controller supports only one pair of slow-down
switches, which are installed near the terminal floor.
The system automatically detects the speed when the elevator reaches a slow-down switch.
If the detected speed or position is abnormal, the system enables the elevator to slow down
at the special deceleration rate set in F3-08, preventing over travel top terminal or over
travel bottom terminal.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-14 Zero-speed control time at startup 0.000–1.000 0.200 s ★
F3-15 Brake release delay 0.000–2.000 0.600 s ★
F3-16 Zero-speed control time at end 0.000–1.000 0.300 s ★
These parameters are used to set the time related to the zero-speed holding current output
and braking action delay.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 118 -
• F3-14 (Zero-speed control time at startup) specifies the time from output of the RUN
contactor to output of the brake contactor, during which the controller performs excitation
on the motor and outputs zero-speed current with large startup torque.
• F3-15 (Brake release delay) specifies the time from the moment when the system sends
the brake release command to the moment when the brake is completely released, during
which the system retains the zero-speed torque current output.
• F3-16 (Zero-speed control time at end) specifies the zero-speed output time when the
running curve ends.
• F8-11 (Brake apply delay) specifies the time from the moment when the system sends the
brake apply command to the moment when the brake is completely applied, during which
the system retains the zero-speed torque current output.
Figure 7-3 Running time sequence
V (speed)
t (time)
F3-14
F3-15 F8-11
F3-16
F2-17
RUN contactor
Brake contactor
Shorting door lock
circuit contactor
Shorting motor
stator contactor
Internal
running status
Leveling signal
RUN contactor feedback
Brake contactor
feedback
Shorting door lock circuit
contactor feedback
Shorting motor
stator contactor
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-17 Low-speed re-leveling speed 0.080 to F3-11 0.100 m/s ★
It is used to set the elevator speed of returning to the leveling position at normal non-leveling
stop.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-18 Acceleration rate at
emergency evacuation 0.100–1.300 0.300 m/s2 ★
It is used to set the acceleration rate at emergency evacuation.
Group F4: Floor Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F4-00 Leveling adjustment 0–60 30 mm ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 119 -
It is used to adjust the leveling accuracy at elevator stop. If over-leveling occurs at all floors
during elevator stop, decrease the value of this parameter properly. If under-leveling occurs
at all floors during elevator stop, increase the value of this parameter properly.
This parameter takes effect to leveling of all floors. Therefore, if leveling at a single floor is
inaccurate, adjust the position of the leveling plate.
The NICE1000 new has the advanced distance control algorithm and adopts many methods to
ensure reliability of direct travel ride. Generally you need not modify this parameter.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F4-01 Current floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
This parameter indicates the current floor of the elevator car.
The system automatically changes the value of this parameter during running, and corrects
it at leveling position (door open limit) after the up slow-down and down slow-down switches
act. At non-bottom floor and top-floor leveling, you can also manually modify this parameter,
but the value must be consistent with the actual current floor.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F4-02 High byte of current floor position 0–65535 1 Pulses ●
F4-03 Low byte of current floor position 0–65535 34464 Pulses ●
These two parameters indicate the absolute pulses of the current position of the elevator car
relative to the bottom leveling position.
The position data of the NICE1000 new in the shaft is recorded in pulses. Each position is
expressed by a 32-bit binary number, where the high 16 bits indicate the high byte of the
floor position, and the low 16 bits indicate the low byte of the floor position.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F4-04 Length 1 of leveling plate 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-05 Length 2 of leveling plate 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
These two parameters respectively indicate the pulses corresponding to the length of
the magnetic value and the length between two leveling sensors. They are automatically
recorded during shaft auto-tuning.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F4-06 High byte of floor height 1 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-07 Low byte of floor height 1 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
…(Floor height 2 to floor height 14)
F4-34 High byte of floor height 15 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-35 Low byte of floor height 15 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
These parameters indicate the pulses corresponding to the floor height i (between the
leveling plates of floor n and floor i+1). Each floor height is expressed by a 32-bit binary
number, where the high 16 bits indicate the high byte of the floor height, and the low 16 bits
indicate the low byte of the floor height. On normal conditions, the floor height i of each floor
is almost the same.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 120 -
Group F5: Input Terminal Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-00 Attendant/Automatic
switchover time 3–200 3 s ★
If there is a hall call at current floor in attendant state, the system automatically switches
over to the automatic (normal) state after the time set in this parameter. After this running is
completed, the system automatically restores to the attendant state (Bit2 of F6-67 must be
set to 1). When the value of this parameter is smaller than 5, this function is disabled, and
the system is in the normal attendant state.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-01 X1 function selection
0–127
33 - ★
F5-02 X2 function selection 104 - ★
F5-03 X3 function selection 105 - ★
… ···
F5-23 X23 function selection 00 - ★
F5-24 X24 function selection 00 - ★
These parameters are used to set the functions of input terminals X1 to X24.
Terminals X1 to X24 are digital inputs, and are allocated with corresponding functions based
on the input signals. The same function must not be allocated to multiple terminals. After the
24 V voltage is input, the corresponding input terminal indicator becomes ON. The functions
are described as follows:
00: Invalid
Even if there is signal input to the terminal, the system has no response. You can allocate
this function to terminals that are not used to prevent mis-function.
01: Leveling 1 signal 02: Leveling 2 signal
03: Door zone signal
The NICE1000 new system determines the elevator leveling position based on the leveling
sensor signal. The system supports three types of leveling configuration: a. single door
zone sensor; b. up and down leveling sensors; c. door zone sensor + up and down leveling
sensor.
If the leveling signal is abnormal (stuck or unavailable), the system reports fault Err22.
04: RUN contactor feedback signal 05: Brake contactor feedback signal 1
06: Brake travel switch feedback signal 1 50: Brake travel switch feedback signal 2
The system detects the feedback from the RUN and brake contactors 2s after outputting the
contactor RUN signal, to determine whether the related contactor is closed properly.
07: Shorting PMSM stator contactor feedback signal
When the elevator enters emergency running state upon power failure, the brake is released
and the related terminal outputs the signal if the motor is PMSM and is in automatic
emergency running state. The car automatically moves to the nearest leveling positionDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 121 -
under the effect of the weighing difference between the car and the counterweight.
This function can also be used at normal elevator stop to improve safety.
08: Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback
It is used to short or release the door lock circuit if the function of door pre-open upon arrival
or re-leveling at door open is enabled for the elevator configured with the pre-open module.
09: Inspection signal 10: Inspection up signal 11: Inspection down signal
When the Automatic/Inspection switch is set to the Inspection position, the elevator enters
the inspection state; in this case, the system cancels all automatic running including the
automatic door operations. When the inspection up signal or inspection down signal is valid,
the elevator runs at the inspection speed.
12: First fire emergency signal
When the first fire emergency switch is turned on, the elevator enters the fire emergency
state, and immediately cancels the registered hall calls and car calls. The elevator stops at
the nearest floor without opening the door, and then directly runs to the fire emergency floor
and automatically opens the door after arrival.
13: Reserved 14: Elevator lock signal
When the elevator lock signal is active, the system enters the elevator lock state.
15: Up limit signal 16: Down limit signal
The up limit signal and down limit signal are used as the stop switches at the terminal floor
to prevent over travel top terminal or over travel bottom terminal when the elevator runs over
the leveling position of the terminal floor but does not stop.
17: Up slow-down signal 18: Down slow-down signal
These signals are set to NO input, corresponding to the slow-down switches. The system
automatically records the positions of the switches in group F3 during shaft auto-tuning.
19: Overload signal
When the elevator load exceeds 110% of the rated load during normal use, the elevator
enters the overload state. Then the overload buzzer beeps, the overload indicator in the car
becomes ON, and the elevator door keeps open.
The overload signal becomes invalid when the door lock is applied. If the running with
110% of the rated load is required during inspection, you can set Bit2 of F6-10 to 1 to allow
overload running (note that this function has potential safety risks and use it with caution).
20: Full-load signal
When the elevator load is 80% to 110% of the rated load, the hall display board displays the
full-load state, and the elevator does not respond to hall calls.
21: Emergency stop (safety feedback) signal
The safety circuit is important to guarantee safe running of the elevator.
22: Door 1 open limit signal 23: Door 2 open limit signal
The terminal with this function is used to receive the corresponding door open limit signal.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 122 -
24: Door 1 close limit signal 25: Door 2 close limit signal
The terminal with this function is used to receive the corresponding door close limit signal.
26: Door machine 1 light curtain signal 27: Door machine 2 light curtain signal
The terminal with this function is used to receive the corresponding light curtain signal.
28: Attendant signal
The elevator enters the attendant operation state after this signal is active.
29: Direct travel ride signal
The elevator does not respond to hall calls when this signal is active in attendant state.
30: Direction change signal
The elevator changes the running direction when this signal is active in attendant state.
31: Independent running signal
The elevator exits the parallel control mode when this signal is active.
31: Door 2 selection signal
If the door open/close is controlled by the switch or button in the car in opposite door control
mode, the terminal is used to receive this signal. When this signal is active, door 2 is used.
When this signal is inactive, door 1 is used.
33: UPS valid signal
The terminal is used to receive the emergency evacuation signal at power failure.
34: Door open button
The terminal is used to receive the door open input signal.
35: Door close button
The terminal is used to receive the door close input signal.
36: Safety circuit
The safety circuit is important to guarantee safe running of the elevator.
37: Door lock circuit 1
It is used to ensure that the hall door and car door have been closed when the elevator
starts to run.
38: Door lock circuit 2
It has the same function as "Door lock circuit 2", so that you can separate the hall door
signal and car door signal.
The system considers that the door lock is effective only when both signals 37 and 38 are
active.
39: Half-load signal
When the car load exceeds half of the limit, this signal becomes active. It is used to judge
the emergency running direction at power failure.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 123 -
40: Motor overheat signal
If this signal remains active for more than 2s, the controller stops output and reports fault
Err39 to prompt motor overheat.
41: Door machine 1 safety edge signal 42: Door machine 2 safety edge signal
They are used to detect the safety edge signal state of door machine 1 and door machine 2
(if existing).
43: Earthquake signal
If this signal remains active for more than 2s, the elevator enters the earthquake stop state,
stops at the nearest landing floor and opens the door. Then the elevator starts running again
after the earthquake signal becomes inactive.
44: Back door forbidden signal
If double door machines are applied, this signal is used to prohibit the use of door machine
2.
45: Light-load signal
It is used for nuisance judgment in the anti-nuisance function. If Bit2 in F8-13 is set to 1, the
system performs nuisance judgment by using the light-load switch. The load below 30% of
the rated load is regarded as light load.
46: Single/Double door selection
This function is valid only in opposite door control mode 3. When this signal is active, the
elevator is double door service state; otherwise, the elevator is in single door service state.
47: Fire emergency floor switchover signal
The NICE1000 new supports two fire emergency floors. By default, the elevator stops at fire
emergency floor 1 in fire emergency state. If this signal is active, the elevator stops at fire
emergency floor 2 in fire emergency state.
48: Virtual floor input
This signal is required when the floor distance is too large.
If the floor distance is too large, the time protection may be enabled and the system reports
Err30 after a long-time running. To solve the problem, you need to set the virtual floor input
at a proper intermediate position of the floor. Then, the elevator clears the counted time after
arriving at this virtual floor, so that the system will not report Err30.
49: Firefighter switch signal
It is the firefighter switch signal and is used to enable the firefighter running. After the
elevator returns to the fire emergency floor, the elevator enters the firefighter running state if
the firefighter signal is active.
51–99: Reserved
101–199: These signals respectively correspond to 01 to 99 in sequence. 01 to 99 are NO
inputs, while 101 to 199 are NC inputs.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 124 -
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-25 X25 higher-voltage input
function selection 01–16 01 - ★
F5-26 X26 higher-voltage input
function selection 01–16 02 - ★
F5-27 X27 higher-voltage input
function selection 01–16 03 - ★
00: Invalid
Even if there is signal input to the terminal, the system has no response. You can allocate
this function to terminals that are not used to prevent mis-function.
01: Safety circuit signal
This terminal is used to detect the higher-voltage signal feedback of the safety circuit.
02: Door lock circuit 1 signal
This terminal is used to detect the higher-voltage signal feedback of the door lock circuit,
including the hall door circuit and car door lock circuit.
03: Door lock circuit 2 signal
This terminal is used to detect the higher-voltage signal feedback of the door lock circuit,
including the hall door circuit and car door lock circuit.
04–16: Reserved
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-28 Terminal state display 1 - - - ●
F5-29 Terminal state display 2 - - - ●
After you enter the F5-28 menu, the operation panel displays the state of all I/O terminals of
the system.
The LEDs are arranged as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 from left to right.
Figure 7-4 I/O terminal state (F5-28)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
5 4 3 2
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
1
The following table describes the meaning of the LED segments indicating the I/O terminal
state in F5-28.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 125 -
Table 7-2 Meaning of the LED segments for F5-28
No. Segment Meaning of Segment ON
1
A Reserved
B Leveling 1 signal active
C Leveling 2 signal active
D Door zone signal active
E RUN contactor output feedback
F Brake contactor feedback 1 signal active
G Brake contactor feedback 2 signal active
DP Shorting PMSM stator contactor feedback signal active
2
A Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback signal
active
B Inspection signal active
C Inspection up signal active
D Inspection down signal active
E First fire emergency signal active
F Reserved
G Elevator lock signal active
DP Up limit signal active
3
A Down limit signal active
B Up slow-down signal active
C Down slow-down signal active
D Overload signal active
E Full-load signal active
F Emergency stop (safety feedback) signal active
G Door 1 open limit signal active
DP Door 2 open limit signal active
4
A Door 1 close limit signal active
B Door 2 close limit signal active
C Door machine 1 light curtain signal active
D Door machine 2 light curtain signal active
E Attendant signal active
F Direct travel ride signal active
G Direction change signal active
DP Independent running signal activeDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 126 -
No. Segment Meaning of Segment ON
5
A Door 2 selection signal active
B UPS input signal active
C Door open button active
D Door close button active
E Door lock circuit 1 signal active
F Door lock circuit 2 signal active
G Half-load signal active
DP Reserved
The following table describes the meaning of the LED segments indicating the I/O terminal
state in F5-29.
Table 7-3 Meaning of the LED segments for F5-29
No. Segment Meaning of Segment ON
1
A Invalid
B Safety circuit signal active
C Door lock circuit 1 signal active
D Door lock circuit 2 signal active
E Reserved
F Reserved
G Reserved
DP Reserved
2
A Y0 output active
B RUN contactor output active
C Brake contactor output active
D Higher-voltage startup of brake active
E Fan/Lamp output active
F Shorting PMSM stator contactor output active
G Door 1 open output active
DP Door 1 close output active
3
A Door 2 open output active
B Door 2 close output active
C Low 7-segment a display output active
D Low 7-segment b display output active
E Low 7-segment c display output active
F Low 7-segment d display output active
G Low 7-segment e display output active
DP Low 7-segment f display output activeDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 127 -
No. Segment Meaning of Segment ON
4
A Low 7-segment g display output active
B Up arrow display output active
C Down arrow output active
D Minus sign display output active
E Returning to base floor at fire emergency output active
F Buzzer output active
G Overload output active
DP Arrival gong output active
5
A Full-load output active
B Inspection output active
C Fan/Lamp output 2 active
D Shorting door lock circuit contactor output active
E BCD/Gray code/7-segment high-bit output active
F Controller normal running output active
G Reserved
DP Reserved
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-30 Floor I/O terminal state display 1 - - - ●
F5-31 Floor I/O button state display 2 - - - ●
After you enter the F5-30 menu, the operation panel displays the state of all floor I/O
terminals of the system.
The LEDs are arranged as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 from left to right.
Figure 7-5 Floor I/O terminal state (F5-30)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
5 4 3 2
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
1
The following table describes the meaning of the LED segments indicating the floor I/O
terminal state in F5-30.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 128 -
Table 7-4 Meaning of the LED segments for F5-30
No. Segment Meaning of Segment ON
1
A Door 1 open button I/O active
B Door 1 close button I/O active
C Door 1 open delay button I/O active
D Floor 1 door 1 car call I/O active
E Floor 2 door 1 car call I/O active
F Floor 3 door 1 car call I/O active
G Floor 4 door 1 car call I/O active
DP Floor 5 door 1 car call I/O active
2
A Floor 6 door 1 car call I/O active
B Floor 7 door 1 car call I/O active
C Floor 8 door 1 car call I/O active
D Floor 9 door 1 car call I/O active
E Floor 10 door 1 car call I/O active
F Reserved
G Reserved
DP Reserved
3
A Floor 1 door 1 up call I/O active
B Reserved
C Floor 2 door 1 up call I/O active
D Floor 2 door 1 down call I/O active
E Floor 3 door 1 up call I/O active
F Floor 3 door 1 down call I/O active
G Floor 4 door 1 up call I/O active
DP Floor 4 door 1 down call I/O active
4
A Floor 5 door 1 up call I/O active
B Floor 5 door 1 down call I/O active
C Floor 6 door 1 up call I/O active
D Floor 6 door 1 down call I/O active
E Floor 7 door 1 up call I/O active
F Floor 7 door 1 down call I/O active
G Floor 8 door 1 up call I/O active
DP Floor 8 door 1 down call I/O activeDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 129 -
No. Segment Meaning of Segment ON
5
A Floor 9 door 1 up call I/O active
B Floor 9 door 1 down call I/O active
C Reserved
D Floor 10 door 1 down call I/O active
E Reserved
F Reserved
G Reserved
DP Reserved
The following table describes the meaning of the LED segments indicating the floor I/O
terminal state in F5-31.
Table 7-5 Meaning of the LED segments for F5-31
No. Segment Meaning of Segment ON
1
A Door 2 open button I/O active
B Door 2 close button I/O active
C Door 2 open delay button I/O active
D Floor 1 door 2 car call I/O active
E Floor 2 door 2 car call I/O active
F Floor 3 door 2 car call I/O active
G Floor 4 door 2 car call I/O active
DP Floor 5 door 2 car call I/O active
2
A Floor 6 door 2 car call I/O active
B Floor 7 door 2 car call I/O active
C Floor 8 door 2 car call I/O active
D Floor 9 door 2 car call I/O active
E Floor 10 door 2 car call I/O active
F Reserved
G Reserved
DP Reserved
3
A Floor 1 door 2 up call I/O active
B Reserved
C Floor 2 door 2 up call I/O active
D Floor 2 door 2 down call I/O active
E Floor 3 door 2 up call I/O active
F Floor 3 door 2 down call I/O active
G Floor 4 door 2 up call I/O active
DP Floor 4 door 2 down call I/O activeDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 130 -
No. Segment Meaning of Segment ON
4
A Floor 5 door 2 up call I/O active
B Floor 5 door 2 down call I/O active
C Floor 6 door 2 up call I/O active
D Floor 6 door 1 down call I/O active
E Floor 7 door 1 up call I/O active
F Floor 7 door 1 down call I/O active
G Floor 8 door 1 up call I/O active
DP Floor 8 door 1 down call I/O active
5
A Floor 9 door 1 up call I/O active
B Floor 9 door 1 down call I/O active
C Reserved
D Floor 10 door 1 down call I/O active
E Reserved
F Reserved
G Reserved
DP Reserved
Group F6: Basic Elevator Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-00 Top floor of the elevator F6-01 to 16 5 - ★
F6-01 Bottom floor of the elevator 1 to F6-00 1 - ★
These two parameters are used to set the top floor and bottom floor of the elevator,
determined by the number of actually installed leveling plates.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-02 Parking floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
When the idle time of the elevator exceeds the value set in F9-00, the elevator returns to the
parking floor automatically.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-03 Fire emergency floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
When entering the state of returning to the fire emergency floor, the elevator returns to this
floor.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-04 Elevator lock floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
When entering the elevator lock state, the elevator returns to this floor.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 131 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-05 Service floors 0–65535 65535 - ★
It is used to set the service floors.
This function code is enabled through bit addressing.
The 16 bits of the function code respectively correspond to 16 floors. If a bit is set to 1, the
elevator will respond to calls of this floor; if this bit is set to 0, the elevator will not respond to
calls of this floor.
Figure 7-6 Converting binary value of F6-05 to decimal
0: Floor 1 not in service
1: Floor 1 in service1
0: Floor 2 not in service
1: Floor 2 in service
0: Floor 3 not in service
1: Floor 3 in service
0: Floor 4 not in service
1: Floor 4 in service
0: Floor 5 not in service
1: Floor 5 in service
0: Floor 6 not in service
1: Floor 6 in service
0: Floor 7 not in service
1: Floor 7 in service
0: Floor 8 not in service
1: Floor 8 in service
0: Floor 9 not in service
1: Floor 9 in service
0: Floor 12 not in service
1: Floor 12 in service
0: Floor 13 not in service
1: Floor 13 in service
0: Floor 14 not in service
1: Floor 14 in service
0: Floor 15 not in service
1: Floor 16 in service
0: Floor 16 not in service
1: Floor 16 in service
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
Bit2
Bit1
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
Bit7
Bit8
Bit9
Bit10
Bit11
Bit12
Bit13
Bit14
Bit15
Bit0Bit11 Bit1Bit2Bit3Bit4Bit5Bit6Bit7Bit8Bit9Bit10Bit12Bit13Bit14Bit15
1612 2481632641282561024204840968192
Bit Addressing
Binary Addressing 1638432768
Floor 1
Floor 2
Floor 3
Floor 4
Floor 5
Floor 6
Floor 7
Floor 8
Floor 9
Floor 10
Floor 11
Floor 12
Floor 13
Floor 14
Floor 15
Floor 16
Floor number indicated by
each bit
Convert binary value to
decimal, and set this decimal
on the operation panel
0: Floor 11 not in service
1: Floor 11 in service
0: Floor 10 not in service
1: Floor 10 in service
Meaning of the binary value
Bit0
Example:
If floors 2, 8, 9, and 12 of a 16-floor elevator need to be forbidden, and all other floors are in
service, we need to set Bit1, Bit7, Bit8, and Bit11 corresponding to floors 2, 8, 9, and 12 to
0, and set the other bits to 1, as shown in the following figure.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 132 -
1
0
4
8
16
32
64
0
0
512
1024
0
4096
8192
16384
32768
Bit2 = 1
Bit1 = 0
Bit3 = 1
Bit4 = 1
Bit5 = 1
Bit6 = 1
Bit7 = 0
Bit8 = 0
Bit9 = 1
Bit10 = 1
Bit11 = 0
Bit12 = 1
Bit13 = 1
Bit14 = 1
Bit15 = 1
Bit0Bit11 Bit1Bit2Bit3Bit4Bit5Bit6Bit7Bit8Bit9Bit10Bit12Bit13Bit14Bit15
1612 2481632641282561024204840968192
Bit Addressing
Binary Addressing 1638432768
Floor 1
Floor 2
Floor 3
Floor 4
Floor 5
Floor 6
Floor 7
Floor 8
Floor 9
Floor 10
Floor 11
Floor 12
Floor 13
Floor 14
Floor 15
Floor 16
Bit0 = 1
Forbidden
Forbidden
Forbidden
Forbidden
Convert the binary value to decimal:
1 + 4 + 8 + 16 + 32 + 64 + 512 + 1024 + 4096 + 8192 + 16384 + 32768 = 63101
Then, enter "63101" for F6-05 on the operation panel.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-06 Elevator function control 1 0–65535 0 - ★
It is used to select the required elevator functions.
Each bit of the function code defines a function, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
Table 7-7 Functions indicated by bits of F6-06
F6-06 Elevator function control 1
Bit Function Description Default
Bit1
Returning to base floor
if position deviation too
large
The elevator stops at nearest landing floor and then
returns to the base floor for verification when the car
position deviation is too large.
0
Bit2 Reserved Reserved -
Bit3 Buzzer not tweet upon
re-leveling
The buzzer output relay does not work upon re-
leveling. 0
Bit5 Cancelling auto reset
of door lock fault The door lock fault is not reset automatically. 0Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 133 -
F6-06 Elevator function control 1
Bit6
Clear floor number
and display direction
in advance
The displayed floor number is cleared before the
elevator reaches the target floor.
If the elevator needs to change the direction, the
changed direction is displayed in advance.
0
Bit8 Hall call not directional
It is used for the application where there is only one
hall call button. The hall call input can be connected
to the up button input or down button input for this
floor on the MCB.
0
Bit9 Not detecting analog
wire breaking
The system does not detect analog wire breaking
during normal running. 0
Bit10
Door lock
disconnected once
when inspection
turned to normal
When the inspection state is turned to the normal
state, the elevator can enters the normal state only
after the door lock is disconnected once.
0
You can view and set F6-06 as follows:
The methods of viewing F6-06 are as follows:
• Method 1 (viewing decimal value): After you enter F6-06, the operation panel displays a
decimal number, corresponding to the sum of all the valid binary values. For example, if
Bit0, Bit3, and Bit8 are valid and other bits are invalid, the displayed decimal number is
00265. The decimal number can be viewed only and cannot be changed.
• Method 2 (viewing bit): On the decimal number display interface, press or ,
and the operation panel displays the value in bits.
Figure 7-6 Viewing F6-06 in bit
123
Bit statusBit Reserved
As shown in the preceding figure, the LEDs are numbered 1, 2, and 3 from right to left. LEDs
2 and 3 indicate the current bit, and LED 1 indicate the status of the current bit: 1 (valid) or
0 (invalid). The preceding figure shows that Bit10 is valid, that is, the function "Door lock
disconnected once when inspection turned to normal" is enabled.
The method of setting F6-06 is as follows:
You can set a total of 16 bits (Bit0 to Bit15). Press or on the operation panel
to view the bits (indicated by LEDs 2 and 3) cyclically, and press to set the status of
the current bit (indicated by LED 1).Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 134 -
Figure 7-7 Viewing bits cyclically
Decimal
display
Bit15
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
Bit7
Bit8
Bit9
Bit10
Bit11
Bit12
Bit 13
Bit14
Function codes with multiple bits can be viewed and set in the same way as F6-06. These
function codes include F6-07, F6-64 to F6-69, FB-07, FC-00 and FC-01, and FE-13 and FE-
14.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-07 Elevator function control 2 0–65535 0 - ★
It is used to select the required elevator functions.
Each bit of the function code defines a function, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
For details on how to view and set this function code in bit, refer to F6-06.
Table 7-8 Functions indicated by bits of F6-07
F6-07 Elevator function control 2
Bit Function Description Default
Bit2 Arrow blinking during
running
The display arrow blinks during elevator running. The
blinking interval is set in F6-08. 0
Bit3 Elevator lock in the
attendant state The elevator is locked properly in the attendant state. 0
Bit6 Fault code not
displayed on keypad
The fault code is not displayed on the keypad of the
MCB. 0
Bit9 Stop holding at brake
feedback abnormal
When the brake feedback is abnormal, the controller
retains the holding torque. 0
Bit10 Cancelling Err30
detection at re-leveling Err30 is not judged during re-leveling. 0
Bit12 Fault auto reset The controller automatically resets the faults once
every hour. 0
Bit 13 Super short floor
function
The controller cannot perform shaft-tuning if the floor
height is less than 500 mm. After this function is
enabled, shaft-tuning can be performed normally.
0
Bit14
Up slow-down not
reset for super short
floor
If this function is enabled, the up slow-down 1 signal
does not reset floor display. The down slow-down 1
signal still resets floor display. This is valid only when
the customized super short floor function is enabled.
0Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 135 -
F6-07 Elevator function control 2
Bit Function Description Default
Bit15
Down slow-down not
reset for super short
floor
If this function is enabled, the down slow-down 1
signal does not reset floor display. The up slow-down
1 signal still resets floor display. This is valid only when
the customized super short floor function is enabled.
0
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-08 Arrow blinking interval 0–5.0 1 - ★
It is used to set the arrow blinking interval when the arrow blinking function is enabled.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-09 Random test times 0–60000 0 - ★
When the test times is set, the elevator selects floors randomly and starts automatic running
until the set times is reached.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-10 Test function
selection
Bit0: Hall call forbidden
Bit1: Door open forbidden
Bit2: Overload forbidden
Bit3: Limit forbidden
0 - ★
• Bit0: Hall call forbidden
The elevator does not respond to hall calls if it is set to 1. It is automatically restored to 0
at power failure.
• Bit1: Door open forbidden
The elevator does not automatically open the door if it is set to 1. It is automatically
restored to 0 at power failure.
• Bit2: Overload forbidden
The overload function does not take effect if it is set to 1. It is automatically restored to 0
at power failure, so that the running at 110% of the rated load is allowed.
• Bit3: Limit forbidden
Limit protection is disabled when it is set to 1, so that you can inspect the limit switches. It
is automatically restored to 0 at power failure. The setting is valid only to the current time.
• Bit4 to Bit15: Reserved
Note that F6-10 can be set only by professional engineers with caution. The consequence
is borne by the person who performs the setting.
Ensure that F6-10 is set to 0 during normal elevator running.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-11 L1 function selection 201–399 201 - ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 136 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-12 L2 function selection 201–399 202 - ★
... ... ... ... ... ...
F6-59 L49 function selection 201–399 00 - ★
F6-60 L50 function selection 201–399 00 - ★
These parameters are used to select the input functions of floor buttons.
The setting values are described in the following table.
200–299
(Door 1
control
parameters)
00 00: Invalid
201–203 (Door 1 open/close)
201: Door 1 open button
202: Door 1 close button
203: Door 1 open delay button
204 Door 2 selection button
205–210 Reserved
211–226 (Door 1 car call)
211: Door 1 floor 1 car call
212: Door 1 floor 2 car call
213: Door 1 floor 3 car call
214: Door 1 floor 4 car call
215: Door 1 floor 5 car call
216: Door 1 floor 6 car call
217: Door 1 floor 7 car call
218: Door 1 floor 8 car call
219: Door 1 floor 9 car call
220: Door 1 floor 10 car call
221: Door 1 floor 11 car call
222: Door 1 floor 12 car call
223: Door 1 floor 13 car call
224: Door 1 floor 14 car call
225: Door 1 floor 15 car call
226: Door 1 floor 16 car call
227–230 ReservedDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 137 -
200–299
(Door 1
control
parameters)
231–245 (Door 1 up call)
231: Door 1 floor 1 up call
232: Door 1 floor 2 up call
233: Door 1 floor 3 up call
234: Door 1 floor 4 up call
235: Door 1 floor 5 up call
236: Door 1 floor 6 up call
237: Door 1 floor 7 up call
238: Door 1 floor 8 up call
239: Door 1 floor 9 up call
240: Door 1 floor 10 up call
241: Door 1 floor 11 up call
242: Door 1 floor 12 up call
243: Door 1 floor 13 up call
244: Door 1 floor 14 up call
245: Door 1 floor 15 up call
246–251 Reserved
252–266 (Door 1 down call)
252: Door 1 floor 2 down call
253: Door 1 floor 3 down call
254: Door 1 floor 4 down call
255: Door 1 floor 5 down call
256: Door 1 floor 6 down call
257: Door 1 floor 7 down call
258: Door 1 floor 8 down call
259: Door 1 floor 9 down call
260: Door 1 floor 10 down call
261: Door 1 floor 11 down call
262: Door 1 floor 12 down call
263: Door 1 floor 13 down call
264: Door 1 floor 14 down call
265: Door 1 floor 15 down call
266: Door 1 floor 16 down call
267-299 Reserved
301–399
(Door 2
control
parameters)
301–303 (Door 2 open/close)
These values are defined in the
same way as those of door 1.
304: Door 2 selection button
indicator
305–310 (Reserved)
311–326 (Door 2 car call)
327–330 (Reserved)
331–345 (Door 2 up call)
346–351 (Reserved)
352–369 (Door 2 down cal)
370–399 (Reserved)Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 138 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-61 Leveling sensor delay 10–50 14 ms ★
It is used to set the delay time from the action time of the leveling sensor to the time when
the leveling signal becomes active. You need not modify this parameter.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-62 Time interval of random
running 0–1000 3 s ☆
It is used to set the time interval between two times of random running.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-64 Program control
selection 1 0–65535 0 - ★
F6-65 Program control
selection 2 0–65535 0 - ★
F6-66 Program control
selection 3 0–65535 0 - ★
These parameters are used to set program control functions.
Each bit of the function code defines a function, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
For details on how to view and set this function code in bit, refer to F6-06.
Table 7-9 Functions indicated by the bits of F6-64
F6-64 Program control selection 1
Bit Function Description Default
Bit1 Soft limit function
When the up slow-down and down leveling signals are
active and the up leveling signal is inactive, the system
considers that the up limit is performed. It is the same for
the down limit signal.
0
Bit4
Opening only one
door of opposite
doors under
manual control
This function is enabled only in the opposite door control
mode 3 (hall call independent, opposite-door manual
control). In this case, only one door opens each time while
the other door must stay in the door close limit state.
0
Bit5
Clearing calls
immediately at
elevator lock
When the elevator lock signal is active, the system
immediately clears the registered calls and enables the
elevator to stop at nearest landing floor and then return to
the elevator lock floor.
0
Bit9 Disabling reverse
floor number clear
The system clears all the current car calls by default
every time the elevator changes the direction. When this
function is enabled, the function of clearing reverse floor
numbers is disabled.
0
Bit11 Responding to car
calls first
The system responds to hall calls only after executing all
car calls. 0Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 139 -
F6-65 Program control selection 2
Bit Function Description Default
Bit2 Inspection to stop
due to slow-down
During inspection running, if the slow-down switch acts,
the system decelerates to stop. 0
Bit4
Buzzer tweet
during door open
delay
The buzzer will tweet when the door open delay time set
in Fb-13 is reached. 0
Bit8 Door open at
elevator lock
In the elevator lock state, the elevator keeps the door
open at the elevator lock floor. 0
Bit9 Display available at
elevator lock In the elevator lock state, hall calls are displayed normally. 0
Bit11 Blinking at arrival The car display blinks when the elevator arrives at a floor.
The blinking advance time is set in F6-74. 0
F6-66 Program control selection 3
Bit Function Description Default
Bit1
Cancelling door
open/close
command at delay
after door open/
close limit
If this function is enabled, the door open/close command
is cancelled at the delay of 1s after door open/close limit. 0
Bit2
Not judging door
lock state at door
close output
On normal conditions, the system determines that the
door is completely closed only when the door close limit
signal is active and the door lock is applied.
If this function is enabled, the system need not judge the
door lock state.
0
Bit3
Door close
command output
during running
The door close command is output continuously during
the elevator running. 0
Bit4
Returning to base
floor for verification
at first-time power-
on
The elevator runs to the bottom floor for verification at
power-on for the first time. 0
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-67 Attendant function selection 0–65535 128 - ★
Each bit of the function code defines a function, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
For details on how to view and set this function code in bit, refer to F6-06.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 140 -
Table 7-10 Attendant-related functions indicated by bits of F6-67
F6-67 Attendant Function Selection
Bit Function Description Default
Bit0
Calls cancelled after
entering attendant
state
All car calls and hall calls are cancelled after the system
enters the attendant state for the first time. 0
Bit1 Not responding to
hall calls
The car blinks inside, prompting there is hall call, but
the system does not respond. 0
Bit2 Attendant/Automatic
state switchover
If this function is enabled, the setting of F5-00
(Attendant/Normal switchover time) is valid. 0
Bit3 Door close at jogging The elevator door closes after the attendant presses the
door close button manually. 0
Bit4 Automatic door close It is the same as the normal state. After the door open
holding time is reached, the door closes automatically. 0
Bit5
Buzzer tweeting at
intervals in attendant
state
When the hall call floor and the car call floor are
different, the buzzer tweets 2.5s at intervals. 0
Bit6
Continuous buzzer
tweeting in attendant
state
When the hall call floor and the car call floor are
different, the buzzer tweets continuously. 0
Bit7 Car call button
blinking to prompt
When the hall call input is active, the car call button for
the corresponding floor blinks to give a prompt. 0
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-68 Fire emergency
function selection 0–65535 16456 - ★
Each bit of the function code defines a function, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
For details on how to view and set this function code in bit, refer to F6-06.
Table 7-11 Fire emergency functions indicated by bits of F6-68
F6-68 Fire Emergency Function Selection
Bit Function Description Default
Bit3
Arrival gong output
in inspection or fire
emergency state
The arrival gong is output in the inspection or fire
emergency state. 0
Bit4
Multiple car calls
registered in fire
emergency state
Multiple car calls can be registered in the fire
emergency state. If this function is disabled, only one
car call can be registered.
0
Bit5
Retentive at power
failure in fire
emergency state
In the fire emergency state, the current system and
car state will be memorized at power failure and be
resumed after the system is powered on again.
0Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 141 -
F6-68 Fire Emergency Function Selection
Bit Function Description Default
Bit6
Closing door by
holding down the door
close button
In the fire emergency state, the door close process
can be completed only by holding down the door close
button until the door close limit is reached. Otherwise,
it will be switched over to door open automatically.
0
Bit9 Displaying hall calls in
fire emergency state Hall calls are displayed in the fire emergency state. 0
Bit11 Exiting fire emergency
state for firefighter
The system can exit the fire emergency state only
after the elevator arrives at the fire emergency floor. 0
Bit12
Not clearing car calls
at reverse door open
in firefighter running
state
In the firefighter running state, the car calls that have
been registered are not cleared at reverse door open. 0
Bit13 Reserved - 0
Bit14
Opening door by
holding down the door
open button
In the fire emergency state, the door open process
can be completed only by holding down the door open
button until the door open limit is reached. Otherwise,
it will be switched over to door close automatically.
0
Bit15 Automatic door open
in fire emergency floor
The door opens automatically after the elevator arrives
at the fire emergency floor. 0
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-69 Emergency evacuation
function selection 0–65535 0 - ★
Each bit of the function code defines a function, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
For details on how to view and set this function code in bit, refer to F6-06.
Table 7-12 Emergency evacuation functions indicated by bits of F6-69
F6-69 Emergency Evacuation Function Selection
Bit Function Description Default
Bit0 Direction
determine mode
0 Automatically
calculating
direction
0 Load direction
determining (based
on load cell data or
half-load signal)
1 Direction
of nearest
landing
floor
0
Bit1 0 1 0 0
Bit2
Stopping at
evacuation
parking floor
During evacuation running, the elevator arrives at the
evacuation parking floor set in F6-73 (it must be a non-zero
value and is a service floor). Otherwise, the elevator stops
at the nearest floor.
0
Bit4 Compensation at
startup
The non-load-cell startup is still valid in the process of
evacuation running. 0Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 142 -
F6-69 Emergency Evacuation Function Selection
Bit Function Description Default
Bit8
Emergency
running time
protection
If the elevator does not arrive at the required floor after
50s emergency evacuation running time, Err33 is reported.
In this case, the function of switching over shorting stator
braking mode to controller drive based on the time setting
cannot be implemented.
0
Bit9 Reserved - 0
Bit10 Emergency
buzzer output
The buzzer tweets at intervals in the emergency evacuation
running state. 0
Bit12
Shorting stator
braking mode
switched over to
controller drive
It enables the function of switching over shorting stator
braking mode to controller drive. 0
Bit 13
Mode of shorting
stator braking
mode switched
over to controller
drive
0
Time setting
If the time of the shorting stator braking mode exceeds
the time set in F6-75, the controller starts to drive the
elevator. 0
1
Speed setting
If the speed is still smaller than the value of F6-72
after 10s in the shorting stator braking mode, the
controller starts to drive the elevator.
Bit14
Emergency
evacuation exit
mode
0
The system exits emergency evacuation when
receiving the door open limit signal from the elevator
that arrives at the target floor. 0
1
The system exits emergency evacuation when
receiving the door close limit signal from the elevator
that arrives at the target floor.
Bit15
Function
selection of
shorting stator
braking mode
When this function is enabled, the setting of related function
codes becomes effective. 0
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-72 Emergency evacuation
switching speed 0.010–0.630 0.010 m/s ★
It is used to set the switching speed at shorting stator braking mode switched over to
controller drive via speed setting.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-73 Evacuation parking floor 0 to F6-00 0 - ★
It is used to set the evacuation parking floor when Bit2 (Stopping at evacuation parking floor)
in F6-69 is enabled.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-74 Blinking advance time 0.0–15.0 1 s ☆Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 143 -
It is used to set the blinking advance time when the elevator arrives the floor required by the
car call.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-75
Waiting time for switchover from
shorting stator braking mode to
controller drive
0.0–45.0 20.0 s ☆
It is used to set the interval for switchover from shorting stator braking mode to controller
drive mode. If the elevator does not reach the leveling position with the time set in this
parameter, the system switches over to the controller drive mode for emergency evacuation.
Group F7: Output Terminal Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F7-00 Y0 function selection 00–05 or 32 00 - ★
As an independent relay output, Y0 can be allocated with any function among all the relay
output functions. When function 32 "emergency evacuation at power failure" is required,
only Y0 can be used as the relay for this output. F7-00 must be set to 32 so that the elevator
can switch over to the emergency evacuation state after power failure.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F7-01 Y1 function selection 00–05 01 - ★
F7-02 Y2 function selection 00–05 02 - ★
F7-03 Y3 function selection 00–05 04 - ★
The functions that can be allocated for F1-01 to F7-03 are as follows:
• 00: Invalid
The terminal has no function.
• 01: RUN contactor output
The terminal with this function controls whether the RUN contactor is opened or closed.
• 02: Brake contactor control
The terminal with this function controls whether the brake contactor is opened or closed.
• 03: Higher-voltage startup of brake
The terminal retains the output for continuous 4s to control startup of the brake.
• 04: Lamp/Fan running
It is used for the lamp/fan running output.
• 05: Shorting PMSM stator contactor
When the elevator enters emergency running state upon power failure, the brake
is released and this signal is output. The car automatically moves to the nearestDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 144 -
leveling position under the effect of the weighing difference between the car and the
counterweight. This function can also be used during normal elevator running to enhance
the safety.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F7-04 Y4 function selection 06–99 00 - ★
F7-05 Y5 function selection 06–99 00 - ★
F7-06 Y6 function selection 06–99 06 - ★
... ... ... ... - ★
F7-27 Y27 function selection 06–99 00 - ★
The output functions are as follows:
00: Invalid
06: Door 1 open output 07: Door 1 close output 08: Door 2 open output
09: Door 2 close output 10: Low 7-segment a display output
11: Low 7-segment b display output 12: Low 7-segment c display output
13: Low 7-segment d display output 14: Low 7-segment e display output
15: Low 7-segment f display output 16: Low 7-segment g display output
17: Up arrow display output 18: Down arrow output
19: Minus sign display output 20: Returning to base floor at fire emergency
21: Buzzer output 22: Overload output 23: Arrival gong output
24: Full-load output 25: Inspection output 26: Fan/Lamp output 2
27: Shorting door lock circuit contactor output
28: BCD/Gray code/7-segment high-bit output
29: Controller normal running output 30: Electric lock output
31: Reserved 32: Emergency evacuation at power failure
33: Forced door close 1 34: Forced door close 2
35: Faulty state 36: Up signal
37: Medical sterilization output 38: Non-door zone stop output
39: Non-service state output 40: Reserved
41: High 7-segment a display output 42: High 7-segment b display output
43: High 7-segment c display output 44: High 7-segment d display output
45: High 7-segment e display output 46: High 7-segment f display output
47: High 7-segment g display output 48–99: ReservedDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 145 -
Group F8: Enhanced Function Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-00 Load for load cell auto-tuning 0–100 0 % ★
It is used to set the load for load cell auto-tuning.
To perform load cell auto-tuning, do as follows:
1. Ensure that F8-01 is set to 0 and F8-08 is set to 1 to make the system allow load cell
auto tuning.
2. Stop the elevator at any floor, with the car in the no-load state. Set F8-00 to 0 and press
ENTER .
3. Put N% load in the car. Then set F8-00 to N and press ENTER .
For example, if you put 500 kg load in the elevator with rated load of 1000 kg, set F8-00
to 50.
After the load-cell auto-tuning is completed, the corresponding no-load and full-load data
will be recorded in F8-06 and F8-07. You can also manually input the data according to the
actual situation.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-01 Pre-torque selection 0–2 0 - ★
It is used to set the pre-torque compensation mode at startup of the elevator.
The values are as follows:
• 0: Pre-torque invalid
Load cell auto-tuning is allowed.
• 1: Load cell pre-torque compensation
With a load cell, the system implements the pre-torque compensation function.
• 2: Automatic pre-torque compensation
The system automatically adjusts the compensated torque at startup without a load cell.
If F8-01 is set to 1, the system outputs the torque matching the load in advance to ensure
the riding comfort at startup. The output torque is limited by F2-08 (Torque upper limit).
When the load torque is greater than the set torque upper limit, the output torque of the
system is the torque upper limit.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-02 Pre-torque offset 0.0–100.0 50.0 % ★
It is used to set the pre-torque offset. It is actually the balance coefficient of the elevator,
indicating the percentage of the car load to the rated load when the counterweight and the
car weight are balanced.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 146 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-03 Drive gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★
F8-04 Brake gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★
These two parameters are used to set the pre-torque gain when the elevator runs on the
drive side or the brake side.
For details, see section 5.1.5.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-05 Current car load 0–255 0 - ●
This parameter is read-only and reflects the load situation in the car. The value is sampled
by the NICE1000 new by using a load cell. This parameter is used to judge overload or full-
load, or calculate the torque current for load cell pre-torque compensation.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-06 Car no-load load 0–255 0 - ★
F8-07 Car full-load load 0–255 100 - ★
These two parameters respectively specify the car no-load load and full-load load. They are AD
sampling values.
Note
If F8-06 = F8-07, the full-load and overload become invalid.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-08 Load cell input
selection
0: MCB digital sampling
1: MCB analog sampling 0 - ☆
It is used to set the channel of elevator load cell signals. Set this parameter correctly before
using the load cell device.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-09 Emergency evacuation
operation speed at power failure 0.000 to F3-11 0.050 m/s ★
It is used to set the speed for emergency evacuation operation at power failure.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-10 Emergency evacuation
operation mode at power failure 0–2 0 - ★
It is used to set the emergency evacuation operation mode at power failure.
• 0: Motor not running
• 1: UPS
• 2: 48 V battery power supplyDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 147 -
For details, see section 5.2.1.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-11 Brake apply delay 0.200–1.500 0.200 s ★
It is used to set the time from the moment when the system sends the brake apply command
to the moment when the brake is completely applied. For details, see Figure 7-3.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-12 Fire emergency floor 2 0 to F6-00 0 - ★
It is used to set the second fire emergency floor. The switchover between fire emergency
floor 1 and fire emergency floor 2 is implemented by means of input from the MCB. When
this signal is input, the elevator enters the fire emergency state and returns to this floor.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-13 Anti-nuisance
function
Bit0: Disabled
Bit1: Judged by light curtain
Bit 2: Judged by light-load
signal
0 - ☆
It is the criteria for judging whether nuisance exists.
• Bit0: Anti-nuisance function disabled
• Bit1: Nuisance judged by light curtain
The system determines that nuisance exists when the light curtain does not act after the
elevator stops at arrival for three consecutive times.
• Bit2: Nuisance judged by light-load signal
If the light-load signal is active, the system determines that nuisance exists when the
number of car calls is greater than a certain value.
When the system determines that the elevator is in the nuisance state, it cancels all car
calls. In this case, call calls need to be registered again.
Group F9: Time Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F9-00 Idle time before
returning to base floor 0–240 10 min ☆
It is used to set the idle time of the elevator before returning to the base floor.
When the idle time of the elevator exceeds the setting of this parameter, the elevator returns
to the base floor.
If this parameter is set to 0, it becomes invalid.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F9-01 Time for fan and lamp
to be turned off 0–240 2 min ☆Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 148 -
It is used to set the time that fan and lamp stays ON before being turned off automatically.
If there is no running command in the automatic running state, the system turns off the fan
and lamp automatically after the time set in this parameter.
If this parameter is set to 0, it becomes invalid.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F9-02 Motor running time limit 0–45 45 s ★
It is used to set the running time limit of the motor.
In normal running state, if the continuous motor running time in the same direction between
two adjacent floors exceeds the setting of this parameter but no leveling signal is received,
the system will perform protection.
This parameter is mainly used for over-time protection in the case of steel rope slipping on
the traction sheave.
If this parameter is set to a value smaller than 3s, it becomes invalid.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F9-03 Accumulative running time 0–65535 0 h ●
F9-05 High byte of running times 0–9999 0 - ●
F9-06 Low byte or running times 0–9999 0 - ●
These parameters are used to view the actual accumulative running time and running times
of the elevator.
Running times of the elevator = F9-11 x 10000 + F9-12.
Group FA: Keypad Setting Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-01 Display in running state 1–65535 65535 - ☆
It is used to set the running parameters displayed on the keypad when the elevator is in the
running state.
A total of 16 running parameters can be displayed during running, each respectively
corresponding to the 16 binary bits of FA-01. If a bit is set to 1, the parameter indicated by
this bit is displayed; if this bit is set to 0, the parameter is not displayed.
You can switch over the displayed parameter by pressing and set whether to display
this parameter according to your own using habit.
The 16 binary bits correspond to the running parameters listed in the following table.
Table 7-13 Running parameters corresponding to 16 bits of FA-01Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 149 -
Bit Parameter Name Default Bit Parameter Name Default
Bit0 Running speed 1 Bit8 Car load 1
Bit1 Set speed 1 Bit9 System state 1
Bit2 Bus voltage 1 Bit10 Pre-toque current 1
Bit3 Output voltage 1 Bit11 Input terminal 1 state 1
Bit4 Output current 1 Bit12 Input terminal 2 state 1
Bit5 Output frequency 1 Bit13 Input terminal 3 state 1
Bit6 Current floor 1 Bit14 Output terminal 1 state 1
Bit7 Current position 1 Bit15 Output terminal 2 state 1
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-02 Display in stop state 1–65535 65535 - ☆
It is used to set the parameters displayed on the keypad when the elevator is in the stop
state.
A total of 16 parameters can be displayed at stop. The use is the same as that of FA-01.
The 16 binary bits correspond to the stop parameters listed in the following table.
Table 7-14 Stop parameters corresponding to 16 bits of FA-02
Bit Parameter Name Default Bit Parameter Name Default
Bit0 Set speed 1 Bit8 Input terminal 2 state 1
Bit1 Bus voltage 1 Bit9 Input terminal 3 state 1
Bit2 Current floor 1 Bit10 Output terminal 1 state 1
Bit3 Current position 1 Bit11 Output terminal 2 state 1
Bit4 Car load 1 Bit12 Reserved 0
Bit5 Slow-down distance at rated
speed 1 Bit13 Reserved 0
Bit6 System state 1 Bit14 Reserved 0
Bit7 Input terminal state 1 1 Bit15 Reserved 0
The running and stop parameters of the NICE1000 new system are the important references
for engineers to perform commissioning on site. The parameters are described as follows:
1. Running speed: indicates the actual running speed of the elevator.
Its maximum value is F0-03 (Maximum running speed), in unit of m/s.
2. Set speed: indicates the set speed of the NICE1000new system during elevator running. It
is the running speed calculated by the system theoretically at which the elevator should
run, in unit of m/s.
3. Bus voltage: indicates the DC bus voltage of the NICE1000 new system, in unit of m/s.
4. Current floor: indicates the information of the physical floor where the elevator is located.
It is the same as the value of F4-01.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 150 -
5. Current position: indicates the absolute distance from the current elevator car to the
leveling plate of the first floor, in unit of m.
6. Car load: indicates the percentage of the car load to the rated load judged by the
NICE1000 new system based on data from the sensor, in unit of %.
7. Output voltage: indicates the effective value of the equivalent voltage of the PWM wave
output by the NICE1000 new system, in unit of V.
8. Output current: indicates the effective value of the actual current when the NICE1000 new
system drives the motor to turn, in unit of A.
9. Output frequency: indicates the actual frequency of the motor during running. It has a
fixed corresponding relationship with the running speed. The unit is Hz.
10. Pre-torque current: indicates the percentage of the pre-torque current compensated
during startup to the rated current, in unit of %.
11. Input terminal 1 state: indicate the meaning of input terminals by bit. "1" indicates that
the signal is active.
A total of 16 bits are defined as below:
Bit Meaning Bit Meaning
Bit0 Reserved Bit8 Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback
Bit1 Up leveling signal Bit9 Inspection signal
Bit2 Down leveling signal Bit10 Inspection up signal
Bit3 Door zone signal Bit11 Inspection down signal
Bit4 RUN contactor feedback Bit12 Fire emergency signal
Bit5 Brake contactor feedback Bit13 Reserved
Bit6 Brake travel switch feedback Bit14 Elevator lock signal
Bit7 Self-lock feedback Bit15 Up limit signal
12. Input terminal 2 state: indicate the meaning of input terminals by bit. "1" indicates that
the signal is active.
A total of 16 bits are defined as below:
Bit Meaning Bit Meaning
Bit0 Down limit signal Bit8 Door 1 close limit
Bit1 Up slow-down signal Bit9 Door 2 close limit
Bit2 Down slow-down signal Bit10 Door machine 1 light curtain
Bit3 Overload signal Bit11 Door machine 2 light curtain
Bit4 Full-load signal Bit12 Attendant signal
Bit5 Emergency stop (safety feedback) signal Bit13 Direct travel ride signal
Bit6 Door 1 open limit Bit14 Direction change signal
Bit7 Door 2 open limit Bit15 Independent running
13. Input terminal 3 state: indicates the meaning of output terminals by bit. "1" indicates thatDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 151 -
the signal is active.
A total of 16 bits are defined as below:
Bit Meaning Bit Meaning
Bit0 Door 2 selection Bit8 Motor overheat
Bit1 UPS input Bit9 Door 1 safety edge
Bit2 Door open button Bit10 Door 2 safety edge
Bit3 Door close button Bit11 Earthquake signal
Bit4 Safety circuit Bit12 Back door forbidden
Bit5 Door lock circuit 1 Bit13 Half-load signal
Bit6 Door lock circuit 2 Bit14 Single/Double door selection
Bit7 Half-load signal Bit15 Fire emergency floor switchover
14. Output terminal 1 state: indicates the meaning of output terminals by bit. "1" indicates
that the signal is active.
A total of 16 bits are defined as below:
Bit Meaning Bit Meaning
Bit0 Reserved Bit8 Door 2 open
Bit1 RUN contactor Bit9 Door 2 close
Bit2 Brake contactor Bit10 Low 7-segment a display output
Bit3 Higher-voltage startup of brake Bit11 Low 7-segment b display output
Bit4 Fan/Lamp output Bit12 Low 7-segment c display output
Bit5 Shorting PMSM stator contactor
output Bit13 Low 7-segment d display output
Bit6 Door 1 open Bit14 Low 7-segment e display output
Bit7 Door 1 close Bit15 Low 7-segment f display output
15. Output terminal 2 state: indicates the meaning of CTB outputs by bit. "1" indicates that
the signal is active.
A total of 16 bits are defined as below:
Bit Meaning Bit Meaning
Bit0 Low 7-segment g display output Bit8 Full-load output
Bit1 Up arrow display output Bit9 Inspection output
Bit2 Down arrow output Bit10 Fan/Lamp output 2
Bit3 Minus sign display output Bit11 Shorting door lock circuit contactor
output
Bit4 Returning to base floor at fire
emergency output Bit12 BCD/Gray code/7-segment c ode
high-bit output
Bit5 Buzzer output Bit13 Controller normal running output
activeDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 152 -
Bit Meaning Bit Meaning
Bit6 Overload output Bit14 Electric lock output
Bit7 Arrival gong output Bit15 Reserved
16. System state: indicates the system state by bit. "1" indicates that the signal is active.
A total of 16 bits are defined as below:
Bit Meaning Bit Meaning
Bit0 Light curtain state 1 Bit8 Car state:
1: Door open
2: Door open holding
3: Door close
4: Door close limit
5: Running
Bit1 Light curtain state 2 Bit9
Bit2 Elevator lock Bit10
Bit3 Fire emergency Bit11
Bit4 Elevator state:
0: Inspection
1: Shaft auto-tuning
3: Return to base floor at fire emergency
4: Firefighter operation
6: Attendant operation
7: Automatic (normal)
Bit12 Full-load
Bit5 Bit13 Overload
Bit6 Bit14 Reserved
Bit7 Bit15 Reserved
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-03 Current encoder angle 0.0–359.9 0.0 Degree (°) ●
It displays the real-time encoder angle. This parameter cannot be modified.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-05 Control board software 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-06 Drive board software 0–65535 0 - ●
These two parameters respectively display the program version number of the logic control
board and the drive control board.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-07 Heatsink temperature 0–100 0 °C ●
It displays the current temperature of the heatsink.
Normally, the heatsink temperature is below 40°C. When the heatsink temperature is too
high, the system lowers the carrier frequency automatically to reduce heat dissipation. When
the heatsink temperature rises to a certain value, the system reports the module overheat
fault and stops running.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 153 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-08 Controller model - 1000 - ●
It displays the NICE series model of the controller.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-11 Pre-torque current 0.0–200.0 0 % ●
It displays the percentage of pre-torque current to the rated current (positive/negative
display, indicating driving or braking).
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-12 Logic information 0–65535 0 - ●
It displays the elevator status parameters.
The LEDs are arranged as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 from left to right. LED 1 shows the state of door 1.
LEDs 2 and 3 have no display. LEDs 4 and 5 together show the elevator state.
The following figure shows the elevator in inspection and door close state.
Figure 7-7 Elevator state display
12345
The LEDs are defined in the following table.
Table 7-15 LED display of the elevator state
LED 5 LED 4 LED 3 LED 2 LED 1
Elevator State No
Display
No
Display Door 1 State
00 Inspection state 8 Elevator lock
- -
0 Waiting state
01 Shaft auto-tuning 09 Idle elevator
parking 1 Door open state
02 Micro-leveling 10 Re-leveling at
inspection speed 2 Door open limit
03
Returning to
base floor at fire
emergency
11
Emergency
evacuation
operation
3 Door close state
04 Firefighter
operation 12 Motor auto-tuning 4 Door close limit
05 Fault state 13 Keypad control - -
06 Attendant
operation 14 Base floor check - -
07 Automatic running - - - -Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 154 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-13 Curve information 0–65535 0 - ●
It displays the system running curve information. Similar to the display of FA-12, LEDs 5, 4
and 3 have no display, while LEDs 2 and 1 show the running curve information.
LED 5 LED 4 LED 3 LED 2 LED 1
No
Display
No
Display
No
Display Curve Information
- - -
00 Standby state 09 Deceleration start segment
01 Zero-speed start
segment 10 Linear deceleration
segment
02 Zero-speed holding
segment 11 Deceleration end segment
03 Reserved 12 Zero speed at stop
04 Startup speed stage 13 Current stop phase
05 Acceleration start
segment 14 Reserved
06 Linear acceleration
segment 15 Stop data processing
07 Acceleration end
segment 16-20 Auto-tuning stage
08 Stable-speed running
segment 21 Emergency operation
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-14 Set speed 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●
FA-15 Feedback speed 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●
FA-16 Bus voltage 0–999.9 0 V ●
FA-17 Present position 0.00–300.0 0 m ●
FA-18 Output current 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
FA-19 Output frequency 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ●
FA-20 Torque current 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
FA-21 Output voltage 0–999.9 0 V ●
FA-22 Output torque 0–200.0 0 % ●
FA-23 Output power 0.00–99.99 0 kW ●
These parameters display the current performance state of the system (the output torque
and output power supports positive/negative display).
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-24 Communication interference 0–65535 0 - ●Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 155 -
It displays the current communication quality of the system, as described in the following
table.
Table 7-16 Communication quality display
LED 5 LED 4 LED 3 LED 2 LED 1
SPI Communication
Quality No Display CAN2 Communication
Quality No Display No Display
0 Good
-
0 Good
- -↓ ↑ ↓ ↑
9 Interrupted 9 Interrupted
0–9 indicates the communication quality. The greater the number is, the larger interference
the communication suffers and the poorer the communication quality is.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-26 Input state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-27 Input state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-28 Input state 3 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-29 Input state 4 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-30 Input state 5 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-31 Output state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-32 Output state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-33 Output state 3 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-34 Floor I/O state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-35 Floor I/O state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-36 Floor I/O state 3 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-37 Floor I/O state 4 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-38 Floor I/O state 5 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-39 Floor I/O state 6 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-40 Floor I/O state 7 0–65535 0 - ●
The following figure shows an example of the displayed input states.
Figure 7-9 Example of input state display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
5 4 3 2
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
1
Each segment indicates a
function code.Function code State
As shown in the preceding figure, the LEDs from right to left are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, andDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 156 -
5. For FA-26 to FA-37, LEDs 5 and 4 show the function No.; LED 3 shows whether the
function is valid (1) or invalid (0); the 16 segments of LEDs 1 and 2 show the states of the
16 functions in this parameter.
The preceding figure shows display of FA-16: LEDs 5, 4, and 3 show that function 10
(Inspection down) is 1 (Valid); LEDs 1 and 2 show that besides function 10, functions 4
(RUN contactor feedback), 5 (Brake contactor feedback), 6 (Brake travel switch feedback),
7 (Shorting PMSM stator contactor feedback), and 8 (Shorting door lock circuit contactor
feedback) are valid.
FA-26 Input state 1 FA-27 Input state 2
No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function
0 Reserved 8
Shorting door lock
circuit contactor
feedback
0 Down limit signal 8 Door 1 close
limit
1 Up leveling signal 9 Inspection signal 1 Up slow-down
signal 9 Door 2 close
limit
2 Down leveling
signal 10 Inspection up 2 Down slow-down
signal 10 Door machine 1
light curtain
3 Door zone signal 11 Inspection down 3 Overload signal 11 Door machine 2
light curtain
4 RUN contactor
feedback 12 Fire emergency
signal 4 Full-load signal 12 Attendant signal
5 Brake contactor
feedback 13 Reserved 5 Emergency stop
signal 13 Direct travel
ride signal
6 Brake travel
switch feedback 14 Elevator lock 6 Door 1 open limit 14 Direction
change signal
7
Shorting PMSM
stator contactor
feedback
15 Up limit signal 7 Door 2 open limit 15 Independent
running
FA-28 Input state 3 FA-29 Input state 4
No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function
0 Door 2 selection 8 Motor overheat 0 Virtual floor 8 Reserved
1 UPS input 9 Door 1 safety edge 1 Firefighter switch 9 Reserved
2 Door open button 10 Door 2 safety edge 2 Brake travel switch
feedback 2 10 Reserved
3 Door close button 11 Earthquake signal 3 Reserved 11 Reserved
4 Safety circuit 12 Back door
forbidden 4 Reserved 12 Reserved
5 Door lock circuit
1 13 Half-load signal 5 Reserved 13 Reserved
6 Door lock circuit
2 14 Single/Double door
selection 6 Reserved 14 Reserved
7 Half-load signal 15 Fire emergency
floor switchover 7 Reserved 15 ReservedDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 157 -
FA-30 Input state 5 FA-31 Output state 1
No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function
0 Reserved 8 Reserved 0 Reserved 8 Door 2 open
1 Higher-voltage
safety circuit 9 Reserved 1 RUN contactor 9 Door 2 close
2 Higher-voltage
door lock circuit 1 10 Reserved 2 Brake contactor 10 Low 7-segment
a display output
3 Higher-voltage
door lock circuit 2 11 Reserved 3 Higher-voltage
startup of brake 11 Low 7-segment
b display output
4 Reserved 12 Reserved 4 Fan/Lamp output 12 Low 7-segment
c display output
5 Reserved 13 Reserved 5
Shorting PMSM
stator contactor
output
13 Low 7-segment
d display output
6 Reserved 14 Reserved 6 Door 1 open 14 Low 7-segment
e display output
7 Reserved 15 Reserved 7 Door 1 close 15 Low 7-segment
f display output
FA-32 Output state 2 FA-33 Output state 3
No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function
0 Low 7-segment g
display output 8 Full-load output 0
Emergency
evacuation at
power failure
8 Reserved
1 Up arrow display
output 9 Inspection output 1 Forced door close
1 9 High 7-segment
a display output
2 Down arrow
output 10 Fan/Lamp output 2 2 Forced door close
2 10 High 7-segment
b display output
3 Minus sign
display output 11
Shorting door lock
circuit contactor
output
3 Faulty state 11 High 7-segment
c display output
4
Returning to
base floor at
fire emergency
output
12
BCD/Gray code/7-
segment c ode
high-bit output
4 Up signal 12 High 7-segment
d display output
5 Buzzer output 13
Controller normal
running output
active
5 Medical sterilization
output 13 High 7-segment
e display output
6 Overload output 14 Electric lock output 6 Non-door zone stop
output 14 High 7-segment
f display output
7 Arrival gong
output 15 Reserved 7 Non-service state
output 15 High 7-segment
g display output
The input/output signals of all floors are viewed in FA-34 to FA-40, as described in the
following table.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 158 -
FA-34 Floor I/O state 1 FA-35 Floor I/O state 2 (door 1 car call)
No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function
0 Door 1 open 8 Door 2 open 0 Floor 1 car call 8 Floor 9 car call
1 Door 1 close 9 Door 2 close 1 Floor 2 car call 9 Floor 10 car call
2 Door 1 open
delay 10 Door 2 open
delay 2 Floor 3 car call 10 Floor 11 car call
3 Door 2
selection 11 Reserved 3 Floor 4 car call 11 Floor 12 car call
4 Reserved 12 Reserved 4 Floor 5 car call 12 Floor 13 car call
5 Reserved 13 Reserved 5 Floor 6 car call 13 Floor 14 car call
6 Reserved 14 Reserved 6 Floor 7 car call 14 Floor 15 car call
7 Reserved 15 Reserved 7 Floor 8 car call 15 Floor 16 car call
FA-36 Floor I/O state 3 (door 1 up call) FA-37 Floor I/O state 4 (door 1 down call)
No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function
0 Floor 1 up call 8 Floor 9 up call 0 Reserved 8 Floor 9 down call
1 Floor 2 up call 9 Floor 10 up call 1 Floor 2 down call 9 Floor 10 down call
2 Floor 3 up call 10 Floor 11 up call 2 Floor 3 down call 10 Floor 11 down call
3 Floor 4 up call 11 Floor 12 up call 3 Floor 4 down call 11 Floor 12 down call
4 Floor 5 up call 12 Floor 13 up call 4 Floor 5 down call 12 Floor 13 down call
5 Floor 6 up call 13 Floor 14 up call 5 Floor 6 down call 13 Floor 14 down call
6 Floor 7 up call 14 Floor 15 up call 6 Floor 7 down call 14 Floor 15 down call
7 Floor 8 up call 15 Reserved 7 Floor 8 down call 15 Floor 16 down call
FA-38 Floor I/O state 5 (door 2 car call) FA-39 Floor I/O state 6 (door 2 up call)
No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function
0 Floor 1 car call 8 Floor 9 car call 0 Floor 1 up call 8 Floor 9 up call
1 Floor 2 car call 9 Floor 10 car call 1 Floor 2 up call 9 Floor 10 up call
2 Floor 3 car call 10 Floor 11 car call 2 Floor 3 up call 10 Floor 11 up call
3 Floor 4 car call 11 Floor 12 car call 3 Floor 4 up call 11 Floor 12 up call
4 Floor 5 car call 12 Floor 13 car call 4 Floor 5 up call 12 Floor 13 up call
5 Floor 6 car call 13 Floor 14 car call 5 Floor 6 up call 13 Floor 14 up call
6 Floor 7 car call 14 Floor 15 car call 6 Floor 7 up call 14 Floor 15 up call
7 Floor 8 car call 15 Floor 16 car call 7 Floor 8 up call 15 ReservedDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 159 -
FA-39 Floor I/O state 7 (door 2 down call) FA-41 System state
No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function
0 Reserved 8 Floor 9 down
call 0 Up direction 8 -
1 Floor 2 down
call 9 Floor 10 down
call 1 Down direction 9 -
2 Floor 3 down
call 10 Floor 11 down
call 2 System in running
state 10 -
3 Floor 4 down
call 11 Floor 12 down
call 3 System full-load 11 -
4 Floor 5 down
call 12 Floor 13 down
call 4 System overload 12 -
5 Floor 6 down
call 13 Floor 14 down
call 5 System half-load 13 -
6 Floor 7 down
call 14 Floor 15 down
call 6 System light-load 14 -
7 Floor 8 down
call 15 Floor 16 down
call 7 - 15 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-41 System state 0–65535 0 - ★
It displays the current system I/O state.
Group Fb: Door Function Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-00 Number of door machine (s) 1–2 1 - ★
It is used to set the number of door machine(s).
Set this parameter based on actual conditions.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-01 Opposite door control mode 0–3 0 - ●
It is used to set the opposite door control mode. The values are as follows:
0: Simultaneous control
1: Hall call independent, car call simultaneous
2: Hall call independent, car call manual control
3: Hall call independent, car call independentDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 160 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-02 Service floors of door
machine 1 0–65535 65535 - ☆
Fb-04 Service floors of door
machine 2 0–65535 65535 - ☆
These parameters are used to set the service floors of door machine 1 and door machine 2.
These parameters are set in the same way as F6-05. For details, refer to F6-05.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-03 Holding time of manual door
open 1–60 10 s ☆
It is used to set the delay time after door open limit under manual control. This parameter is
valid only the manual door function is used.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-06 Door open protection time 5–99 10 s ☆
It is used to set the door open protection time.
After outputting the door open command, if the system does not receive the door open limit
signal after the time set in this parameter, the system re-opens the door. When the door
open/close times reach the value set in Fb-09, the system reports fault Err48.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-07 Program control selection 0–65535 0 - ☆
It is used to select the required program control functions.
Each bit of the function code defines a function, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
For details on how to view and set this function code in bit, refer to F6-06.
Table 7-16 Program control functions indicated by bits of Fb-07
Fb-07 Program control selection
Bit Function Description Default
Bit5 Synchronous motor
current detection
The system detects the output current at startup of the
synchronous motor, and blocks the output and forbids
running if the current is abnormal.
0
Bit13
Higher voltage/
Lower voltage 1.5s
detection
When the higher voltage/lower voltage safety and
door lock signals are set, the higher voltage and
lower voltage signals must be consistent within 1.5s.
Otherwise, the system considers that the signals are
invalid. You need to power on the system again and
then the system restores the detection.
0Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 161 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-08 Door close protection time 5–99 15 s ☆
It is used to set the door close protection time.
After outputting the door close command, if the system does not receive the door close limit
signal after the time set in this parameter, the system re-closes the door. When the door
open/close times reach the value set in Fb-09, the system reports fault Err49.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-09 Door open/close
protection times 0–20 0 - ☆
It is used to set the door re-open/re-close times allowed when door open/close is abnormal.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-10 Door state of standby elevator 0–2 0 - ☆
It is used to set the door state when the elevator is in stop and standby state.
The values are as follows:
• 0: Closing the door as normal at base floor
• 1: Waiting with door open at base floor
• 2: Waiting with door open at each floor
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-11 Door open holding
time for hall call 1–1000 5 s ☆
It is used to set the door open holding time when there is a hall call. The elevator closes the
door immediately after receiving a door close command.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-12 Door open holding
time for car call 1–1000 3 s ☆
It is used to set the door open holding time when there is a car call. The elevator closes the
door immediately after receiving a door close command.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-13 Door open holding time upon
open delay valid 10–1000 30 s ☆
It is used to set the door open holding time when there is door open delay input. The
elevator closes the door immediately after receiving a door close command.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-14 Door open holding
time at base floor 1–1000 10 s ☆Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 162 -
It is used to set the door open holding time after the elevator arrives at the base floor. The
elevator closes the door immediately after receiving a door close command.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-15 Arrival gong output delay 0–1000 0 ms ☆
It is used to set the delay of arrival gong output.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-16 Door lock waiting time at
manual door 0–50 0 s ☆
When the manual door function is enabled, the elevator responds to other calls only after
the time set in this parameter if the door lock is not disconnected upon arrival.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-17 Holding time for
forced door close 5–180 120 s ☆
It is used to set the holding time before forced door close is implemented.
If the forced door close function is enabled, the system enters the forced door close state
and sends a forced door close signal when there is no door close signal after the time set in
this parameter is reached.
Group FC: Protection Function Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-00 Program control for
protection function 0–65535 0 - ★
It is used to set program control related to protection functions.
Each bit of the function code defines a function, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
For details on how to view and set this function code in bit, refer to F6-06.
Table 7-17 Program control functions indicated by bits of FC-00
FC-00 Program control for protection function
Bit Function Description Default
Bit0
Short-circuit to
ground detection at
power-on
Whether the motor is short-circuited to ground is
detected at power-on. If the motor is short-circuited to
ground, the controller blocks the output immediately,
and reports the fault.
0
Bit1
Canceling current
detection at
inspection startup
You can cancel the limit on the maximum current at
startup for inspection. 0Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 163 -
FC-00 Program control for protection function
Bit Function Description Default
Bit2
Decelerating to
stop at valid light
curtain
During normal-speed running, the elevator decelerates
to stop immediately after the light curtain acts, and
then runs to the registered destination floor after the
light curtain restores. This function is mainly used in
the case of manual door.
0
Bit3
Password
ineffective if no
operation within 30
minutes
If you does not perform operation 30 minutes after
entering the password, the operation panel exits the
function code interface automatically. You need to
enter the password again to perform operation.
0
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-01 Program control 2 for
protection function 0–65535 1 - ★
It is used to set program control related to protection functions. "1" indicates that the function
is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
FC-01 Program control 2 for protection function
Bit Function Description Default
Bit0 Overload protection It sets whether to implement overload protection. 1
Bit1 Canceling protection
at output phase loss
It sets whether to implement protection at output phase
loss. 0
Bit2 Canceling over-
modulation
It sets whether to implement over-modulation.
0: Over-modulation enabled
1: Over-modulation disabled
0
Bit4
Light curtain
judgment at door
close limit
At door close limit, the door re-opens if the light curtain
is valid. 0
Bit5
Canceling SPI
communication
judgment
It sets whether to implement wire-breaking detection
on SPI communication between the MCB and the drive
board.
0
Bit9 Canceling Err55
alarm
The system does not report fault Err55 when the door
open limit signal at arrival becomes inactive. 0
Bit14 Canceling protection
at input phase loss
It sets whether to implement protection at input phase
loss. 0
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-02 Overload protection coefficient 0.50–10.00 1.00 - ★
After detecting that the output current exceeds (FC-02 x Rated motor current) and the
duration lasts the time specified in the inverse time lag curve, the system outputs fault Err11
indicating motor overload.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-03 Overload pre-warning coefficient 50–100 80 % ★Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 164 -
After detecting that the output current exceeds (FC-03 x Rated motor current) and the
duration lasts the time specified in the inverse time lag curve, the system outputs a pre-
warning signal.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-04 Designated fault 0–9999 0 - ●
It is used to designate the fault to be monitored.
The designated fault code is saved in parameters of FC-05 to FC-15, and will not be
overwritten.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-05 Designated fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-06 Designated fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-07 Logic information of
designated fault 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-08 Curve information of
designated fault 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-09 Set speed upon
designated fault 0.000–1.750 0 m/s ●
FC-10 Feedback speed upon
designated fault 0.000–1.750 0 m/s ●
FC-11 Bus voltage upon
designated fault 0.0–999.9 0 V ●
FC-12 Current position upon
designated fault 0.0–300.0 0 m ●
FC-13 Output current upon
designated fault 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
FC-14 Output frequency upon
designated fault 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ●
FC-15 Torque current upon
designated fault 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-16 1st fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-17 1st fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-18 2nd fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-19 2nd fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
···
FC-34 10th fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-35 10th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
These parameters record the latest 10 faults of the elevator.
The fault code is a 4-digit number. The two high digits indicate the floor where the car isDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 165 -
located when the fault occurs, and the two low digits indicate the fault code. For example,
the 1st fault code is 0835, indicating that when the 1st fault (fault Err35) occurs, the car is
near floor 8.
The fault subcode is used to locate the causes of the fault. The specific fault time is
recorded in month, day, hour and minute.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-36 Latest fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-37 Latest fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-38 Logic information of latest fault 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-39 Curve information of latest fault 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-40 Set speed upon latest fault 0.000–1.750 0 m/s ●
FC-41 Feedback speed upon latest
fault 0.000–1.750 0 m/s ●
FC-42 Bus voltage upon latest fault 0.0–999.9 0 V ●
FC-43 Current position upon latest fault 0.0–300.0 0 m ●
FC-44 Output current upon latest fault 0–999.9 0 A ●
FC-45 Output frequency upon latest
fault 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ●
FC-46 Torque current upon latest fault 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
Group Fd: Communication Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fd-00 Local address 0–127
0: Broadcast address 1 - ★
Fd-01 Communication
response delay 0–20 10 ms ★
Fd-02 Communication
timeout
0.0–60.0
0: Invalid 0.0 s ★
These RS232 serial port communication parameters are used for communication with the
monitor software in the host computer.
• Fd-00 specifies the current address of the controller. The setting of these two parameters
must be consistent with the setting of the serial port parameters on the host computer.
• Fd-01 specifies the delay for the controller to send data by means of the serial port.
• Fd-02 specifies the communication timeout time of the serial port. Transmission of
each frame must be completed within the time set in this parameter; otherwise, a
communication fault occurs.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 166 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fd-03 Number of elevators in
parallel control mode 1–2 1 - ★
Fd-04 Elevator No. 1–2 1 - ★
These two parameters are used to set the quantity and No. of the elevators in parallel
control mode.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fd-05 Parallel control function
selection Bit0: Dispersed waiting 1 - ★
When Bit0 = 1, the elevator does not return to the base floor; one elevator waits at the base
floor and the other waits at a non-base floor.
Group FE: Elevator Function Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FE-00 Collective selective mode 0–2 0 - ★
It is used to set the collective selective mode of the system.
The values are as follows:
• 0: Full collective selective
The elevator responds to both up and down hall calls.
• 1: Down collective selective
The elevator responds to down hall calls but does not respond to up hall calls.
• 2: Up collective selective
The elevator responds to hall up calls but does not respond to hall down calls.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 167 -
Function
Code
Parameter
Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FE-01 Floor 1 display The two high digits
indicate the display
code of the ten’s
digit, and the two
low digits indicate
the display code of
the unit’s digit.
00: Display "0"
01: Display "1"
02: Display "2"
03: Display "3"
04: Display "4"
05: Display "5"
06: Display "6"
07: Display "7"
08: Display "8"
09: Display "9"
10: Display "A"
11: Reserved
12: Reserved
13: Display "H"
14: Display "L"
15: Reserved
16: Display "P"
17: Reserved
18: Display "-"
19: No display
23: Display "C"
24: Display "d"
25: Display "E"
26: Display "F"
28: Display "J"
31: Display "o"
35: Display "U"
1901 - ☆
FE-02 Floor 2 display 1902 - ☆
FE-03 Floor 3 display 1903 - ☆
FE-04 Floor 4 display 1904 - ☆
FE-05 Floor 5 display 1905 - ☆
Floor 6 to floor 10 display ···
FE-11 Floor 11 display 0101 - ☆
FE-15 Floor 12 display 0102 - ☆
FE-16 Floor 13 display 0103 - ☆
FE-17 Floor 14 display 0104 - ☆
FE-18 Floor 15 display 0105 - ☆
FE-19 Floor 16 display 0106 - ☆
These parameters are used to set the display of each floor. The setting range is 0000–9999,
where the two high digits indicate the display code of the ten's digit, and the two low digits
indicate the display code of the unit's digit.
Function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FE-12 Hall call output
selection 0–4 1 - ☆
It is used to set the coding method of the hall display board. By default, the system uses the
BCD code.
• 0: 7-segment code
• 1: BCD code
• 2: Gray code
• 3: Binary code
• 4: One-to-one output
7-segment code: For the output setting, see the description in Group F7.
BCB/Gray code: A Y output controls a display bit. In the NICE1000new
, the output parameter
of each display bit is based on the parameter setting of 7-segment code, as described in the
following table.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 168 -
Bit Parameter of Output Y Bit Parameter of Output Y
Low Bit0 10: Low 7-segment a display
output Low Bit3 13: Low 7-segment d display
output
Low Bit1 11: Low 7-segment b display
output High bits 28: High bit output of BCD/
Gray/7-segment code
Low Bit2 12: Low 7-segment c display
output - -
Binary code: A Y output controls a display bit. In the NICE1000 new
, the output parameter of
each display bit is based on the parameter setting of 7-segment code, as described in the
following table.
Bit Parameter of Output Y Bit Parameter of Output Y
Bit0 10: Low 7-segment a display output Bit3 13: Low 7-segment d display output
Bit1 11: Low 7-segment b display output Bit4 14: Low 7-segment e display output
Bit2 12: Low 7-segment c display output - -
One to one output: A Y output is used for the display of each floor. In the NICE1000new
, the
output parameter of each floor display is based on the parameter setting of 7-segment code,
as described in the following table.
Floor Parameter of Output Y Floor Parameter of Output Y
1 10: Low 7-segment a display output 9 42: High 7-segment b display output
2 11: Low 7-segment b display output 10 43: High 7-segment c display output
3 12: Low 7-segment c display output 11 44: High 7-segment d display output
4 13: Low 7-segment d display output 12 45: High 7-segment e display output
5 14: Low 7-segment e display output 13 46: High 7-segment f display output
6 15: Low 7-segment f display output 14 47: High 7-segment g display output
7 16: Low 7-segment g display output 15 19: Minus sign display output
8 41: High 7-segment a display output 16 28: High bit output of BCD/Gray/
7-segment code
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FE-13 Elevator function selection 1 0–65535 0 - ☆
Each bit of the function code defines a function, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
For details on how to view and set this function code in bit, refer to F6-06.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 169 -
Table 7-18 Elevator functions indicated by bits of FE-13
FE-13 Elevator function selection 1
Bit Function Description Default
Bit2 Re-leveling function
The elevator performs re-leveling at a low speed
with door open. An external shorting door lock circuit
contactor needs to be used together.
0
Bit3 Door pre-open
function
During normal stop, when the elevator speed is
smaller than a certain value and the door zone signal
is active, the system shorts the door lock by means of
the shorting door lock circuit contactor and outputs the
door open signal, implementing door pre-open. This
improves the elevator use efficiency.
0
Bit5 Forced door close
If the door still does not close within the time set in Fb-
17 in automatic state, the system outputs the forced
door close signal; at this moment, the light curtain
becomes invalid and the buzzer tweets.
0
Bit6
Door open valid at
non-door zone in
the inspection state
In the inspection state, you can open/close the door by
pressing the door open/close button at the non-door
zone.
0
Bit7
Door open and
close once after
inspection turned to
normal
The elevator door opens and closes once after the
system turns from first-time inspection to normal
running.
0
Bit9 Independent
running The independent running function is enabled. 0
Bit11
Door re-open after
car call of the
present floor
The door re-opens if the car call of the present floor is
valid during door close. 1
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FE-14 Elevator function selection 2 0–65535 0 - ☆
It is used to set the elevator functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0"
indicates that the function is disabled.
It is used to set the elevator functions.
Each bit of the function code defines a function, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
For details on how to view and set this function code in bit, refer to F6-06.
Table 7-19 Elevator functions indicated by bits of FE-14
FE-14 Elevator Function Selection 2
Bit Function Description Default
Bit1 Door open holding
at open limit
The system still outputs the door open command
upon door open limit. 0Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 170 -
FE-14 Elevator Function Selection 2
Bit Function Description Default
Bit2
Door close
command not
output upon door
close limit
The system stops outputting the door close
command upon door close limit. 0
Bit3 Manual door
When this function is enabled, the system does not
output the door open/close command (electric lock
output still active), and does not detect door open/
close limit.
0
Bit4
Auto reset for
RUN and brake
contactor stuck
If the feedback of the RUN and brake contactors is
abnormal, faults Err36 and Err37 are reported, and
you need to manually reset the system.
With this function, the system resets automatically
after the fault symptom disappears. A maximum of
three auto reset times are supported.
0
Bit5 Slow-down switch
stuck detection
The system detects the state of slow-down switches.
Once detecting that a slow-down switch is stuck,
the system instructs the elevator to slow down
immediately and reports a corresponding fault.
1
Bit10
NO/NC output
selection of
shorting PMSM
stator contactor
Bit10 = 0: NC output contactor
Bit10 = 1: NO output contactor 0
Bit12 Fan/Lamp output Bit12 = 0: NC output
Bit12 =1: NO output 0
Group Fr: Leveling Adjustment Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fr-00 Leveling
adjustment function
0: Disabled
1: Enabled 0 - ★
This parameter is used to enable the leveling adjustment function.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fr-01 Leveling adjustment record 1
00000–60060
30030 mm ★
Fr-02 Leveling adjustment record 2 30030 mm ★
… …
Fr-08 Leveling adjustment record 8 30030 mm ★
These parameters are used to record the leveling adjustment values. Each parameter
records the adjustment information of two floors, and therefore, 40 floor adjustment records
are supported totally.
The method of viewing the record is shown in the following figure.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes- 171 -
Figure 7-10 Viewing the leveling adjustment record
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
5 4 3 2
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
1
Each segment indicates a
function code.Function code State
As shown in the preceding figure, the left two LEDs and the right two LEDs respectively
show the adjustment bases of floor 1 and floor 2. If the value is larger than 30, it is upward
leveling adjustment; if the value is smaller than 30, it is downward leveling adjustment. The
default value "30" indicates that there is no leveling adjustment. The maximum adjustment
range is ±30 mm.
The leveling adjustment method is as follows:
1. Ensure that shaft auto-tuning is completed successfully, and the elevator runs properly
at normal speed.
2. Set Fr-00 to 1 to enable the car leveling adjustment function. Then, the elevator shields
hall calls, automatically runs to the top floor, and keeps the door open after arrival. If the
elevator is at the top floor, it directly keeps the door open.
3. Go into the car, press the top floor button, and the leveling position is changed 1 mm
upward; press the bottom floor button, and the leveling position is changed 1 mm
downward. The value is displayed in the car.
Positive value: up arrow + value, negative value: down arrow + value, adjustment range:
±30 mm
4. After completing adjustment for the current floor, press the top floor button and bottom
floor button in the car at the same time to save the adjustment result. The car display
restores to the normal state. If the leveling position of the current floor need not be
adjusted, press the top floor button and bottom floor button in the car at the same time
to exit the leveling adjustment state. Then, car calls can be registered.
5. Press the door close button, and press the button for the next floor. The elevator runs
to the next floor and keeps the door open after arrival. Then, you can perform leveling
adjustment.
6. After completing adjustment for all floors, set Fr-00 to 0 to disable the leveling
adjustment function. Otherwise, the elevator cannot be used.
Group FF: Factory Parameters
Group FP: User Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FP-00 User password 0–65535 0 - ☆
It is used to set the user password. The value 0 indicates that no password is used.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Description of Function Codes NICE1000new User Manual- 172 -
If it is set to any non-zero number, the password protection function is enabled. After a
password has been set and taken effect, you must enter the correct password in order to
enter the menu. If the entered password is incorrect, you cannot view or modify parameters.
If FP-00 is set to 00000, the previously set user password is cleared, and the password
protection function is disabled.
Remember the password that you set. If the password is set incorrectly or forgotten, contact
Monarch to replace the control board.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FP-01 Parameter update 0–2 0 - ★
It is used to set processing on the parameters.
The values are as follows:
• 0: No operation
• 1: Restore default settings
• 2: Clear fault records
If you set this parameter to 1 (Restore default settings), all parameters except group F1 are
restored to the default settings. Be cautions with this setting.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FP-02 User-defined
parameter display
0: Invalid
1: Valid 0 - ★
It is used to set whether to display the parameters that are modified.
When it is set to 1, the parameters that are different from the default setting are displayed.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
8
TroubleshootingDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Troubleshooting NICE1000new User Manual- 174 -
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Maintenance
8.1.1 Routine Maintenance
The influence of the ambient temperature, humidity, dust and vibration will cause the aging
of the components inside the controller, which may cause potential faults or reduce the
service life of the controller. Therefore, it is necessary to carry out routine and periodic
maintenance.
Routine maintenance involves checking:
• Whether abnormal noise exists during motor running
• Whether the motor vibrates excessively
• Whether the installation environment of the controller changes
• Whether the cooling fan works properly
• Whether the controller overheats
Routine cleaning involves:
• Keep the controller clean all the time.
• Remove the dust, especially metal powder on the surface of the controller, to prevent the
dust from entering the controller.
• Clear the oil stain on the cooling fan of the controller.
8.1.2 Periodic Inspection
Perform periodic inspection on the items that are difficult to check during running. Periodic
inspection involves:
• Check and clean the air filter periodically.
• Check whether the screws become loose.
• Check whether the controller is corroded.
• Check whether the wiring terminals have arc signs.
• Carry out the main circuit insulation test.
Note
Before measuring the insulating resistance with megameter (500 VDC megameter
recommended), disconnect the main circuit from the controller. Do not use the
insulating resistance meter to test the insulation of the control circuit. The high voltage
test need not be performed again because it has been completed before delivery.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000new User Manual Troubleshooting- 175 -
8.1.3 Replacement of Vulnerable Components
Vulnerable components of the controller include the cooling fan and filter electrolytic
capacitor. Their service life is related to the operating environment and maintenance.
The service life of the two components is listed in the following table.
Table 8-1 Service life of cooling fan and filter electrolytic capacitor
Component Service Life Possible Damage Cause Judging Criteria
Fan 2 to 3 years • Bearing worn
• Blade aging
• Check whether there is crack on
the blade.
• Check whether there is abnormal
vibration noise upon startup.
Electrolytic
capacitor 4 to 5 years
• Input power supply in
poor quality
• High ambient
temperature
• Frequent load jumping
• Electrolytic aging
• Check whether there is liquid
leakage.
• Check whether the safety valve
has projected.
• Measure the static capacitance.
• Measure the insulating resistance.
The service life is obtained based on the following conditions:
• Ambient temperature: average 30°C per year
• Load rate: below 80%
• Running time: less than 20 hours per day
8.1.4 Storage of the Controller
For storage of the controller, pay attention to the following two aspects:
1. Pack the controller with the original packing box provided by Monarch.
2. Long-term storage degrades the electrolytic capacitor. Thus, the controller must be
energized once every 2 years, each time lasting at least 5 hours. The input voltage must
be increased slowly to the rated value with the regulator.
8.2 Description of Fault Levels
The NICE1000 new has almost 60 pieces of alarm information and protective functions. It
monitors various input signals, running conditions and feedback signals. If a fault occurs, the
system implements the relevant protective function and displays the fault code.
The controller is a complicated electronic control system and the displayed fault information
is graded into five levels according to the severity. The faults of different levels are handled
according to the following table.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Troubleshooting NICE1000new User Manual- 176 -
Table 8-2 Fault levels
Category Action Remarks
Level 1
1. Display the fault code.
2. Output the fault relay action
command.
1A. The elevator running is not affected on any
condition.
Level 2
1. Display fault code.
2. Output the fault relay action
command.
3. Continue normal running of
the elevator.
2A. The paralle/group control l function is
disabled.
2B. The door pre-open/re-leveling function is
disabled.
Level 3
1. Display the fault code.
2. Output the fault relay action
command.
3. Stop output and apply the
brake immediately after stop.
3A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops at
special deceleration rate, and cannot restart.
3B. In low-speed running, the elevator does
not stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator
stops, and then can start running at low speed
after a delay of 3s.
Level 4
1. Display the fault code.
2. Output the fault relay action
command.
3. In distance control, the
elevator decelerates to stop
and cannot run again.
4A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops
under special deceleration rate, and cannot
restart.
4B. In low-speed running, the elevator does
not stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator
stops, and then can start running at low speed
after a delay of 3s.
4C. In low-speed running, the elevator does
not stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator
stops, and then can start running at low speed
after a delay of 3s.
Level 5
1. Display the fault code.
2. Output the fault relay action
command.
3. The elevator stops
immediately.
5A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops
immediately and cannot restart.
5B. In low-speed running, the elevator does
not stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator
stops, and then can start running at low speed
after a delay of 3s.
Note
• A, B, and C are fault sub-category.
• Low-speed running involves inspection, emergency evacuation, shaft auto-tuning, re-leveling,
motor auto-tuning, base floor detection, and running in operation panel control.
• Normal-speed running involves automatic running, returning to base floor in fire emergency
state, firefighter operation, attendant operation, elevator lock, and elevator parking.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000new User Manual Troubleshooting- 177 -
8.3 Fault Information and Troubleshooting
If an alarm is reported, the system performs corresponding processing based on the fault
level. You can handle the fault according to the possible causes described in the following
table.
Table 8-3 Fault codes and troubleshooting
Fault
Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err02
Overcurrent
during
acceleration
• The main circuit output
is grounded or short
circuited.
• Motor auto-tuning is
performed improperly.
• The load is too heavy.
• The encoder signal is
incorrect.
• The UPS running
feedback signal is
incorrect.
• Check whether the RUN
contactor at the controller
output side is normal.
• Check:
־ Whether the power cable
jacket is damaged
־ Whether the power cable is
possibly short circuited to
ground
־ Whether the power cable is
connected reliably
• Check the insulation of motor
power terminals, and check
whether the motor winding is
short-circuited or grounded.
• Check whether shorting PMSM
stator causes controller output
short circuit.
• Check whether motor
parameters comply with the
nameplate.
• Perform motor auto-tuning
again.
• Check whether the brake
keeps released before the fault
occurs and whether the brake
is stuck mechanically.
• Check whether the balance
coefficient is correct.
• Check whether the encoder
wirings are correct. For
asynchronous motor, perform
SVC and compare the current
to judge whether the encoder
works properly.
(To be continued)
5A
Err03
Overcurrent
during
deceleration
• The main circuit output
is grounded or short
circuited.
• Motor auto-tuning is
performed improperly.
• The load is too heavy.
• The deceleration rate is
too short.
• The encoder signal is
incorrect.
5ADownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Troubleshooting NICE1000new User Manual- 178 -
Fault
Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err04 Overcurrent at
constant speed
• The main circuit output
is grounded or short
circuited.
• Motor auto-tuning is
performed properly.
• The load is too heavy.
• The encoder is seriously
interfered with.
• Check:
־ Whether encoder pulses
per revolution (PPR) is set
correctly
־ Whether the encoder signal is
interfered with
־ Whether the encoder cable
runs through the duct
independently
־ Whether the cable is too long
־ Whether the shield is
grounded at one end
• Check:
־ Whether the encoder is
installed reliably
־ Whether the rotating shaft is
connected to the motor shaft
reliably
־ Whether the encoder is stable
during normal-speed running
• Check whether UPS feedback
is valid in the non-UPS running
state (Err02).
• Check whether the
acceleration/deceleration rate
is too high (Err02, Err03).
(End)
5ADownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000new User Manual Troubleshooting- 179 -
Fault
Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err05
Overvoltage
during
acceleration
• The input voltage is too
high.
• The regeneration power
of the motor is too high.
• The braking resistance is
too large, or the braking
unit fails.
• The acceleration rate is
too short.
• Adjust the input voltage.
Observe whether the bus
voltage is normal and whether
it rises too quickly during
running.
• Check for the balance
coefficient.
• Select a proper braking
resistor and check whether the
resistance is too large based
on the recommended braking
resistance table in chapter 3.
• Check:
־ Whether the cable connecting
the braking resistor is
damaged
־ Whether the cooper wire
touches the ground
־ Whether the connection is
reliable
5A
Err06
Overvoltage
during
deceleration
• The input voltage is too
high.
• The braking resistance is
too large, or the braking
unit fails.
• The deceleration rate is
too short.
5A
Err07 Overvoltage at
constant speed
• The input voltage is too
high.
• The braking resistance is
too large, or the braking
unit fails.
5A
Err09 Undervoltage
• Instantaneous power
failure occurs on the
input power supply.
• The input voltage is too
low.
• The drive control board
fails.
• Eliminate external power
supply faults and check
whether the power fails during
running.
• Check whether the wiring of all
power input cables is secure.
• Contact the agent or Monarch.
5A
Err10 Controller
overload
• The brake circuit is
abnormal.
• The load is too heavy.
• The encoder feedback
signal is abnormal.
• The motor parameters
are incorrect.
• A fault occurs on the
motor power cables.
• Check the brake circuit and
power input.
• Reduce the load.
• Check whether the encoder
feedback signal and setting are
correct, and whether the initial
angle of the encoder for the
PMSM is correct.
• Check the motor parameter
setting and perform motor
auto-tuning.
• Check the power cables of the
motor (refer to the solution of
Err02).
4ADownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Troubleshooting NICE1000new User Manual- 180 -
Fault
Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err11 Motor overload
• FC-02 is set improperly.
• The brake circuit is
abnormal.
• The load is too heavy.
• Adjust the parameter (FC-
02 can be set to the default
value).
• Refer to the solution of Err10.
3A
Err12 Power supply
phase loss
• The power input phases
are not symmetric.
• The drive control board
fails.
• Check whether the three
phases of power supply are
balanced and whether the
power voltage is normal. If not,
adjust the power input.
• Contact the agent or Monarch.
4A
Err13 Power output
phase loss
• The output wiring of the
main circuit is loose.
• The motor is damaged.
• Check the wiring.
• Check whether the contactor
on the output side is normal.
• Eliminate the motor fault.
4A
Err14 Module
overheat
• The ambient temperature
is too high.
• The fan is damaged.
• The air filter is blocked.
• Lower the ambient
temperature.
• Clear the air filter.
• Replace the damaged fan.
• Check whether the installation
clearance of the controller
satisfies the requirement.
5A
Err15 Output
abnormal
• Braking short-circuit
occurs on the output
side.
• The U, V, W output is
abnormal.
• Check wiring of the braking
resistor and braking unit is
correct, without short-circuit.
• Check whether the main
contactor works properly.
• Contact the agent or Monarch.
5A
Err16 Current control
fault
The excitation current
deviation is too large.
The torque current deviation
is too large.
The torque limit is exceeded
for a very long time.
• Check the circuit of the
encoder.
• The output MCCB becomes
OFF.
• The values of the current loop
parameters are too small.
• Perform motor auto-tuning
again if the zero-point position
is incorrect.
• Reduce the load if it too heavy.
5ADownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000new User Manual Troubleshooting- 181 -
Fault
Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err17
Reference
signal of
the encoder
incorrect
The deviation between the
Z signal position and the
absolute position is too
large.
The deviation between the
absolute position angle and
the accumulative angle is
too large.
• Check whether the encoder
runs properly.
• Check whether the encoder
wiring is correct and reliable.
• Check whether the PG card
wiring is correct.
• Check whether the grounding
of the control cabinet and the
motor is normal.
5A
Err18 Current
detection fault
The drive control board
fails. Contact the agent or Monarch. 5A
Err19 Motor auto-
tuning fault
The motor cannot rotate
properly.
The motor auto-tuning
times out.
The encoder for the PMSM
fails.
• Enter the motor parameters
correctly.
• Check the motor wiring and
whether phase loss occurs
on the contactor at the output
side.
• Check the encoder wiring and
ensure that the encoder PPR
is set properly.
• Check whether the brake
keeps released during no-load
auto-tuning.
• Check whether the inspection
button is released before the
PMSM with-load auto-tuning is
finished.
5ADownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Troubleshooting NICE1000new User Manual- 182 -
Fault
Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err20
Speed
feedback
incorrect
1: AB signals are lost during
auto-tuning.
3: The phase sequence of
the motor is incorrect.
4: Z signal cannot be
detected during auto-tuning.
5: The CD signal cables
of the SIN/COS encoder
break.
7: The UVW cables of the
UVW encoder break.
8: The angle deviation is
too large.
9: Overspeed occurs or the
speed deviation is too large.
10/11: AB signals or CD
signals of the SIN/COS
encoder are interfered with.
12: The detected speed is 0
at torque limit.
13: AB signals are lost
during running.
14: Z signal is lost during
running.
19: The AB analog signal
cables break during low-
speed running.
55: CD signal error or
serious Z signal interference
occurs during auto-tuning.
3: Exchange any two phases of
the motor UVW cables.
1, 4, 5, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 14, 19:
Check that all signal cable wiring
of the encoder is correct and
secure.
9: Check that the setting of F1-
00, F1-12, and F1-25 for the
synchronous motor is correct.
12: Check that there is no
mechanical stuck and that the
brake has been released during
running.
55: Check that the grounding is
reliable and eliminate interference
problems.
5A
Err22 Leveling signal
abnormal
101: The leveling signal
is active during floor
switchover.
102: The falling edge of
the leveling signal is not
detected during elevator
startup and floor switchover.
103: The leveling position
deviation is too large in
elevator auto-running state.
101, 102:
• Check whether the leveling
and door zone sensors work
properly.
• Check the installation verticality
and depth of the leveling
plates.
• Check the leveling signal input
points of the MCB.
103: Check whether the steel
rope slips.
1A
Err25 Storage data
abnormal
101, 102:
The storage data of the
MCB is abnormal.
101, 102: Contact the agent or
Monarch. 4ADownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000new User Manual Troubleshooting- 183 -
Fault
Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err26 Earthquake
signal
101: The earthquake signal
is active and the duration
exceeds 2s.
101: Check that the earthquake
signal is consistent with the
parameter setting (NC, NO) of the
MCB.
3B
Err29
Shorting
PMSM stator
feedback
abnormal
101: The shorting PMSM
stator feedback is
abnormal.
101:
• Check that the state (NO, NC)
of the feedback contact on the
contactor is correct.
• Check that the contactor
and corresponding feedback
contact act correctly.
• Check the coil circuit of
the shorting PMSM stator
contactor.
5A
Err30
Elevator
position
abnormal
101, 102:
In the normal-speed running
or re-leveling running mode,
the running time is larger
than the value of F9-02, but
the leveling signal has no
change.
101, 102:
• Check whether the leveling
signal cables are connected
reliably and whether the signal
copper wires may touch the
ground or be short circuited
with other signal cables.
• Check whether the distance
between two floors is too large,
causing too long re-leveling
running time.
• Check whether signal loss
exists in the encoder circuits.
4A
Err33 Elevator speed
abnormal
101: The detected running
speed during normal-speed
running exceeds the limit.
102: The speed exceeds
the limit during inspection
or shaft auto-tuning.
103: The speed exceeds
the limit in shorting stator
braking mode.
104: The speed exceeds
the limit during emergency
running.
105: The emergency
running time protection
function is enabled (set
in Bit8 of F6-69), and the
running time exceeds 50s,
causing the timeout fault.
101:
• Check whether the encoder is
used properly.
• Check the setting of motor
nameplate parameters.
Perform motor auto-tuning
again.
102: Attempt to decrease the
inspection speed or perform
motor auto-tuning again.
103: Check whether the shorting
PMSM stator function is enabled.
104, 105:
• Check whether the emergency
power capacity meets the
requirements.
• Check whether the emergency
running speed is set properly.
5ADownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Troubleshooting NICE1000new User Manual- 184 -
Fault
Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err34 Logic fault Logic of the MCB is
abnormal. Contact the agent or Monarch. 5A
Err35
Shaft auto-
tuning data
abnormal
101: When shaft auto-
tuning is started, the
elevator is not at the bottom
floor or the down slow-down
is invalid,
102: The system is not
in the inspection state
when shaft auto-tuning is
performed.
103: It is judged upon
power-on that shaft auto-
tuning is not performed.
104: In distance control
mode, it is judged at running
startup that shaft auto-
tuning is not performed.
106, 107, 109, 114: The
plate pulse length sensed
at up/down leveling is
abnormal.
108, 110: No leveling signal
is received within 45s
continuous running.
111, 115: The stored floor
height is smaller than 50
cm.
112: The floor when auto-
tuning is completed is not
the top floor.
113: The pulse check is
abnormal.
101: Check that the down slow-
down switch is valid, and that F4-
01 (Current floor) is set to 1.
102: Check that the inspection
switch is in inspection state.
103, 104:
Perform shat auto-tuning.
106, 107, 109, 114:
• Check that NO/NC setting
of the leveling sensor is set
correctly
• Check whether the leveling
plates are inserted properly
and whether there is strong
power interference if the
leveling sensor signal blinks.
• Check whether the leveling
plate is too long for the
asynchronous motor.
108, 110:
Check whether the running times
out: No leveling signal is received
when the running time exceeds
F9-02.
111, 115:
Enable the super short floor
function if the floor distance
is less than 50 cm. If the floor
distance is normal, check
installation of the leveling plate for
this floor and check the sensor.
112: Check whether the setting of
F6-00 (Top floor of the elevator) is
smaller than the actual condition.
113: Check whether the signal
of the leveling sensor is normal.
Perform shaft auto-tuning again.
4CDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000new User Manual Troubleshooting- 185 -
Fault
Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err36
RUN contactor
feedback
abnormal
101: The feedback of the
RUN contactor is active, but
the contactor has no output.
102: The controller outputs
the RUN signal but receives
no RUN feedback.
103: The startup current of
the asynchronous motor is
too small.
104: When both feedback
signals of the RUN
contactor are enabled, their
states are inconsistent.
101, 102, 104:
• Check whether the feedback
contact of the contactor acts
properly.
• Check the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the feedback contact.
103:
• Check whether the output
cables UVW of the controller
are connected properly.
• Check whether the control
circuit of the RUN contactor
coil is normal.
5A
Err37
Brake
contactor
feedback
abnormal
101: The output of the brake
contactor is inconsistent
with the feedback.
102: When both feedback
signals of the brake
contactor are enabled, their
states are inconsistent.
103: The output of the brake
contactor is inconsistent
with the feedback 2.
104: When both feedback
2 signals of the brake
contactor are enabled, their
states are inconsistent.
101 to 104:
• Check whether the brake coil
and feedback contact are
correct.
• Check the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the feedback contact.
• Check whether the control
circuit of the brake contactor
coil is normal.
5A
Err38 Encoder signal
abnormal
101: Pulse signal change
in F4-03 does not change
within the time threshold in
of F1-13.
102: The running direction
and pulse direction are
inconsistent.
101, 102:
• Check whether the encoder is
used correctly.
• Exchange phases A and B of
the encoder.
• Check whether the system and
signal cables are grounded
reliably.
• Check whether cabling
between the encoder and the
PG card is correct.
5A
Err39 Motor overheat
101: The motor overheat
relay input remains valid for
a certain time.
101:
• Check whether the thermal
protection relay is normal.
• Check whether the motor is
used properly and whether it is
damaged.
• Improve cooling conditions of
the motor.
3ADownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Troubleshooting NICE1000new User Manual- 186 -
Fault
Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err40
Elevator
running
reached
The set elevator running
time is reached.
Check the related parameter, or
contact the agent or Monarch. 4B
Err41 Safety circuit
disconnected
101: The safety circuit
signal becomes OFF.
101:
• Check the safety circuit
switches and their states.
• Check whether the external
power supply is normal.
• Check whether the safety
circuit contactor acts properly.
• Confirm the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the feedback contact of
the safety circuit contactor.
5A
Err42
Door lock
disconnected
during running
101: The door lock circuit
feedback is invalid during
the elevator running.
101:
• Check whether the hall door
lock and the car door lock are
in good contact.
• Check whether the door lock
contactor acts properly.
• Check the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the feedback contact on
the door lock contactor.
• Check whether the external
power supply is normal.
5A
Err43 Up limit signal
abnormal
101: The up limit switch
acts when the elevator is
running in the up direction.
101:
• Check the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the up limit switch.
• Check whether the up limit
switch is in good contact.
• Check whether the limit switch
is installed at a relatively low
position and acts even when
the elevator arrives at the
terminal floor normally.
4C
Err44
Down limit
signal
abnormal
101: The down limit switch
acts when the elevator
is running in the down
direction.
101:
• Check the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the down limit switch.
• Check whether the down limit
switch is in good contact.
• Check whether the limit switch
is installed at a relatively high
position and thus acts even
when the elevator arrives at
the terminal floor normally.
4CDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000new User Manual Troubleshooting- 187 -
Fault
Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err45
Slow-down
switch position
abnormal
101: The down slow-down
distance is insufficient
during shaft auto-tuning.
102: The up slow-down
distance is insufficient
during shaft auto-tuning.
103: The slow-down
position is abnormal during
normal running.
104, 105: The elevator
speed exceeds the
maximum speed when
slow-down is enabled.
101 to 103:
• Check whether the up slow-
down and the down slow-down
are in good contact.
• Check the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the up slow-down and
the down slow-down.
104, 105:
Ensure that the obtained slow-
down distance satisfies the slow-
down requirement at the elevator
speed.
4B
Err46 Re-leveling
abnormal
101: The leveling signal is
inactive during re-leveling.
102: The re-leveling running
speed exceeds 0.1 m/s.
103: At startup of normal-
speed running, the re-
leveling state is valid and
there is shorting door lock
circuit feedback.
104: During re-leveling, no
shorting door lock circuit
feedback or door lock signal
is received 2s after shorting
door lock circuit output.
101: Check whether the leveling
signal is normal.
102: Check whether the encoder
is used properly.
103, 104:
• Check whether the signal of
the leveling sensor is normal.
• Check the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the feedback contact on
the shorting door lock circuit
contactor, and check the relay
and wiring of the SCB-A board.
2B
Err47
Shorting door
lock circuit
contactor
abnormal
101: During re-leveling
or pre-open running, the
shorting door lock circuit
contactor outputs for
continuous 2s, but the
feedback is invalid and the
door lock is disconnected.
102: During re-leveling
or pre-open running, the
shorting door lock circuit
contactor has no output,
but the feedback is valid for
continuous 2s.
103: During re-leveling
or pre-open running, the
output time of the shorting
door lock circuit contactor is
larger than 15s.
101, 102:
• Check the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the feedback contact on
the shorting door lock circuit
contactor.
• Check whether the shorting
door lock circuit contactor acts
properly.
103:
• Check whether the leveling
and re-leveling signals are
normal.
• Check whether the re-leveling
speed is set too low.
2BDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Troubleshooting NICE1000new User Manual- 188 -
Fault
Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err48 Door open fault
101: The consecutive times
that the door does not open
to the limit reaches the
setting in Fb-13.
101:
• Check whether the door
machine system works
properly.
• Check whether the CTB is
normal.
• Check whether the door open
limit signal is normal.
5A
Err49 Door close
fault
101: The consecutive times
that the door does not open
to the limit reaches the
setting in Fb-13.
101:
• Check whether the door
machine system works
properly.
• Check whether the CTB is
normal.
• Check whether the door lock
acts properly.
5A
Err50
Consecutive
loss of leveling
signal
Leveling signal stuck or loss
occurs for three consecutive
times (Err22 is reported for
three consecutive times).
• Check whether the leveling
and door zone sensors work
properly.
• Check the installation verticality
and depth of the leveling
plates.
• Check the leveling signal input
points of the MCB. Check
whether the steel rope slips.
5A
Err51
CAN
communication
abnormal
101: Feedback data of
CANbus communication
with the CTB remains
incorrect.
101:
• Check the communication
cable connection.
• Check the power supply of the
CTB.
• Check whether the 24 V power
supply of the controller is
normal.
• Check whether strong-power
interference on communication
exists.
1ADownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000new User Manual Troubleshooting- 189 -
Fault
Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err52
HCB
communication
abnormal
101: Feedback data of
Modbus communication
with the HCB remains
incorrect.
101:
• Check the communication
cable connection.
• Check whether the 24 V power
supply of the controller is
normal.
• Check whether the HCB
addresses are repeated.
• Check whether strong-power
interference on communication
exists.
1A
Err53 Door lock fault
101: The door lock
feedback signal remains
active for more than 3s
during door open.
102: The multiple door lock
feedback signal states are
inconsistent for more than
2s.
101:
• Check whether the door lock
circuit is normal.
• Check whether the feedback
contact of the door lock
contactor acts properly.
• Check whether the system
receives the door open limit
signal when the door lock
signal is valid.
102:
Check whether when the hall
door lock signal and the car
door lock signal are detected
separately, the detected states of
the hall door locks and car door
lock are inconsistent.
5A
Err54
Overcurrent
at inspection
startup
The current at startup for
inspection exceeds 110% of
the rated current.
• Reduce the load
• Change Bit1 of FC-00 to 1
to cancel the startup current
detection function.
5A
Err55 Stop at another
landing floor
101: During automatic
running of the elevator,
the door open limit is not
achieved at the present
floor.
101: Check the door open limit
signal at the present floor. 1A
Err57
Serial
peripheral
interface (SPI)
communication
abnormal
101, 102: The SPI
communication is
abnormal. No correct data
is received with 2s of DSP
communication.
103: The MCB does not
match the AC drive.
101, 102: Check the wiring
between the control board and
the drive board.
103: Contact the agent or
Monarch.
5ADownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Troubleshooting NICE1000new User Manual- 190 -
Fault
Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err58
Shaft position
switches
abnormal
101: The up slow-
down and down slow-
down are disconnected
simultaneously.
102: The up limit feedback
and down limit feedback
are disconnected
simultaneously.
101, 102:
• Check whether the states
(NO, NC) of the slow-down
switches and limit switches are
consistent with the parameter
setting of the MCB.
• Check whether malfunction of
the slow-down switches and
limit switches occurs.
4B
Err62 Analog input
cable broken
The analog input cable
of the CTB or the MCB is
broken.
• Check whether F8-08 is set
correctly.
• Check whether the analog
input cable of the CTB or MCB
is connected incorrectly or
broken.
1A
Note
• Fault Err41 is not recorded in the elevator stop state.
• Fault Err42 is reset automatically when the door lock circuit is shorted or 1s after the fault
occurs in the door zone.
• If faults Err51 and Err52 persist, they are recorded once every one hour.
• Except the fault code and level, the number (such as 1, 101) indicates the fault subcode.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
9
EMCDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Troubleshooting NICE1000new User Manual- 192 -
Chapter 9 EMC
9.1 Definition of Terms
1. EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) describes the ability of electronic and electrical
devices or systems to work properly in the electromagnetic environment and not to
generate electromagnetic interference that influences other local devices or systems.
In other words, EMC includes two aspects: The electromagnetic interference generated
by a device or system must be restricted within a certain limit; the device or system must
have sufficient immunity to the electromagnetic interference in the environment.
2. First environment
Environment that includes domestic premises, it also includes establishments directly
connected without intermediate transformers to a low-voltage power supply network
which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes
3. Second environment
Environment that includes all establishments other than those directly connected to a
low-voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes
4. Category C1 Controller
Power Drive System (PDS) of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, intended for use in the
first environment
5. Category C2 Controller
PDS of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, which is neither a plug in device nor a movable
device and, when used in the first environment, is intended to be installed and
commissioned only by a professional
6. Category C3 Controller
PDS of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, intended for use in the second environment and
not intended for use in the first environment
7. Category C4 Controller
PDS of rated voltage equal to or above 1 000 V, or rated current equal to or above 400
A, or intended for use in complex systems in the second environment
9.2 Introduction to EMC Standard
9.2.1 Installation Environment
The system manufacturer using the controller is responsible for compliance of the system
with the European EMC directive. Based on the application of the system, the integrator
must ensure that the system complies with standard EN 61800-3: 2004 Category C2, C3 or
C4.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000new User Manual Troubleshooting- 193 -
The system (machinery or appliance) installed with the controller must also have the CE
mark. The system integrator is responsible for compliance of the system with the EMC
directive and standard EN 61800-3: 2004 Category C2.
WARNING
If applied in the first environment, the controller may generate radio interference. Besides the
CE compliance described in this chapter, users must take measures to avoid such interference,
if necessary.
9.2.2 Requirements on Satisfying the EMC Directive
1. The controller requires an external EMC filter. The recommended filter models are listed
in Table 9-1. The cable connecting the filter and the controller should be as short as
possible and be not longer than 30 cm. Furthermore, install the filter and the controller
on the same metal plate, and ensure that the grounding terminal of the controller and
the grounding point of the filter are in good contact with the metal plate.
2. Select the motor and the control cable according to the description of the cable in
section 9.4.
3. Install the controller and arrange the cables according to the cabling and grounding in
section 9.4.
4. Install an AC reactor to restrict the current harmonics. For the recommended models,
see Table 9-2.
9.3 Selection of Peripheral EMC Devices
9.3.1 Installation of EMC Input Filter on Power Input Side
An EMC filter installed between the controller and the power supply can not only restrict the
interference of electromagnetic noise in the surrounding environment on the controller, but
also prevents the interference from the controller on the surrounding equipment.
The NICE1000new controller satisfies the requirements of category C2 only with an EMC filter
installed on the power input side. The installation precautions are as follows:
• Strictly comply with the ratings when using the EMC filter. The EMC filter is category I
electric apparatus, and therefore, the metal housing ground of the filter should be in good
contact with the metal ground of the installation cabinet on a large area, and requires
good conductive continuity. Otherwise, it will result in electric shock or poor EMC effect.
• The grounds of the EMC filter and the PE conductor of the controller must be tied to the
same common ground. Otherwise, the EMC effect will be affected seriously.
• The EMC filter should be installed as closely as possible to the power input side of the
controller.
The following table lists the recommended manufacturers and models of EMC filters for the
NICE1000 new controller. Select a proper one based on actual requirements.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
EMC NICE1000new User Manual- 194 -
Table 9-1 Recommended manufacturers and models of EMC filter
Controller Model Power
Capacity (kVA)
Rated Input
Current (A)
AC Input Filter
Model (Changzhou
Jianli)
AC Input Filter
Model (Schaffner)
Three-phase 380 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-L-H-4002 4.0 6.5 DL-10EBK5 FN 3258-7-44
NICE-L-H-4003 5.9 10.5 DL-16EBK5 FN 3258-16-33
NICE-L-H-4005 8.9 14.8 DL-16EBK5 FN 3258-16-33
NICE-L-H-4007 11.0 20.5 DL-25EBK5 FN 3258-30-33
NICE-L-H-4011 17.0 29.0 DL-35EBK5 FN 3258-30-33
NICE-L-H-4015 21.0 36.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-42-33
NICE-L-H-4018 24.0 41.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-42-33
NICE-L-H-4022 30.0 49.5 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-55-34
NICE-L-H-4030 40.0 62.0 DL-65EBK5 FN 3258-75-34
NICE-L-H-4037 57.0 77.0 DL-80EBK5 FN 3258-100-35
NICE-L-H-4045 69.0 93.0 DL-100EBK5 FN 3258-100-35
Three-phase 220, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-L-H-2002 4.0 11.0 DL-16EBK5 FN 3258-7-44
NICE-L-H-2003 5.9 17.0 DL-25EBK5 FN 3258-7-44
220-NICE-L-H-4007 17.0 29.0 DL-35EBK5 FN 3258-7-44
220-NICE-L-H-4011 21.0 36.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-16-33
220-NICE-L-H-4015 24.0 41.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-16-33
220-NICE-L-H-4018 30.0 40.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-30-33
220-NICE-L-H-4022 40.0 49.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-30-33
220-NICE-L-H-4030 57.0 61.0 DL-65EBK5 FN 3258-42-33
Single-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-L-H-2002 2.3 13.2 DL-20TH1 FN2090-20-06
NICE-L-H-2003 3.4 17.0 DL-20TH1 FN2090-20-06
220-NICE-L-H-4007 9.8 29.0 DL-30TH1 FN2090-30-08
220-NICE-L-H-4011 12.1 36.0 DL-40K3
Consult the
manufacturer.
220-NICE-L-H-4015 13.9 41.0 DL-50T3
220-NICE-L-H-4018 17.3 40.0 DL-50T3
220-NICE-L-H-4022 23.1 49.0 DL-50T3
220-NICE-L-H-4030 33.0 61.0 DL-70TH1Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual EMC- 195 -
9.3.2 Installation of AC Input Reactor on Power Input Side
An AC input reactor is installed to eliminate the harmonics of the input current. As an optional
device, the reactor can be installed externally to meet strict requirements of an application
environment for harmonics. The following table lists the recommended manufacturers and
models of input reactors.
Table 9-2 Recommended manufacturers and models of AC input reactors
Controller Model Power Capacity (kVA) Rated Input
Current (A)
AC Input Reactor Model
(Innovation)
Three-phase 380 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-L-H-4002 4.0 6.5 MD-ACL-7-4T-222-2%
NICE-L-H-4003 5.9 10.5 MD-ACL-10-4T-372-2%
NICE-L-H-4005 8.9 14.8 MD-ACL-15-4T-552-2%
NICE-L-H-4007 11.0 20.5 MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2%
NICE-L-H-4011 17.0 29.0 MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2%
NICE-L-H-4015 21.0 36.0 MD-ACL-40-4T-153-2%
NICE-L-H-4018 24.0 41.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
NICE-L-H-4022 30.0 49.5 MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
NICE-L-H-4030 40.0 62.0 MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2%
NICE-L-H-4037 57.0 77.0 MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2%
NICE-L-H-4045 69.0 93.0 MD-ACL-120-4T-453-2%
Three-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-L-H-2002 4.0 11.0 MD-ACL-15-4T-222-2%
NICE-L-H-2003 5.9 17.0 MD-ACL-30-4T-222-2%
220-NICE-L-H-4007 17.0 29.0 MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2%
220-NICE-L-H-4011 21.0 36.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-113-2%
220-NICE-L-H-4015 24.0 41.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-153-2%
220-NICE-L-H-4018 30.0 40.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
220-NICE-L-H-4022 40.0 49.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
220-NICE-L-H-4030 57.0 61.0 MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2%
Single-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-L-H-2002 2.3 13.2
Consult the manufacturer.
NICE-L-H-2003 3.4 17.0
220-NICE-L-H-4007 9.8 29.0
220-NICE-L-H-4011 12.1 36.0
220-NICE-L-H-4015 13.9 41.0
220-NICE-L-H-4018 17.3 40.0
220-NICE-L-H-4022 23.1 49.0
220-NICE-L-H-4030 33.0 61.0Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
EMC NICE1000new User Manual- 196 -
9.4 Shielded Cable
9.4.1 Requirements for the Shielded Cable
The shielded cable must be used to satisfy the EMC requirements. Shielded cables are
classified into three-conductor cable and four-conductor cable. If conductivity of the cable
shield is not sufficient, add an independent PE cable, or use a four-conductor cable, of
which one phase conductor is PE cable.
The three-conductor cable and four-conductor cable are shown in the following figure.
ON
ShieldPE conductor
and shield
ON
Shield
The motor cable and PE shielded conducting wire (twisted shielded) should be as short
as possible to reduce electromagnetic radiation and external stray current and capacitive
current of the cable.
To suppress emission and conduction of the radio frequency interference effectively, the
shield of the shielded cable is cooper braid. The braided density of the cooper braid should
be greater than 90% to enhance the shielding efficiency and conductivity, as shown in the
following figure.
Cable
core
Internal
insulator
Copper braidCopper shieldInsulation jacket
It is recommended that all control cables be shielded. The grounding area of the shielded
cable should be as large as possible. A suggested method is to fix the shield on the metal
plate using the metal cable clamp so as to achieve good contact, as shown in the following
figure.
Metal plateMetal cable clamp
Shielded cable
The following figure shows the grounding method of the shielded cable.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual EMC- 197 -
Figure 9-1 Grounding of the shielded cable
The shield must
be grounded.
9.4.2 Installation Precautions of the Shielded Cable
• Symmetrical shielded cable is recommended. The four-conductor shielded cable can also
be used as an input cable.
• The motor cable and PE shielded conducting wire (twisted shielded) should be as short
as possible to reduce electromagnetic radiation and external stray current and capacitive
current of the cable. If the motor cable is over 100 meters long, an output filter or reactor
is required.
• It is recommended that all control cables be shielded.
• It is recommended that a shielded cable be used as the output power cable of the
controller; the cable shield must be well grounded. For devices suffering from interference,
shielded twisted pair (STP) cable is recommended as the lead wire and the cable shield
must be well grounded.
9.4.3 Cabling Requirement
1. The motor cables must be laid far away from other cables, with recommended distance
larger than 0.5 m. The motor cables of several controllers can be laid side by side.
2. It is recommended that the motor cables, power input cables and control cables be laid
in different ducts. To avoid electromagnetic interference caused by rapid change of the
output voltage of the controller, the motor cables and other cables must not be laid side
by side for a long distance.
3. If the control cable must run across the power cable, make sure they are arranged at an
angle of close to 90°. Other cables must not run across the controller.
4. The power input and output cables of the controller and weak-current signal cables
(such as control cable) should be laid vertically (if possible) rather than in parallel.
5. The cable ducts must be in good connection and well grounded. Aluminium ducts can
be used to improve electric potential.
6. The filter and controller should be connected to the cabinet properly, with spraying
protection at the installation part and conductive metal in full contact.
7. The motor should be connected to the system (machinery or appliance) properly, with
spraying protection at the installation part and conductive metal in full contact.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
EMC NICE1000new User Manual- 198 -
Figure 9-2 Cabling diagram
NICE1000 new
integrated
elevator
controller
Min. 200 mm Minimum 300 mm
Power cable
Motor cable
Minimum 500 mm
Minimum 500 mm
Braking resistor cable
Motor cable
Power cable
90°
90°
90°
Control cable
Control cable
Power cable Control cable
Control cable
9.5 Solutions to Common EMC Interference Problems
The controller generates very strong interference. Although EMC measures are taken,
the interference may still exist due to improper cabling or grounding during use. When the
controller interferes with other devices, adopt the following solutions.
Interference Type Solution
Leakage protection
switch tripping
• Connect the motor housing to the PE of the controller.
• Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains power supply.
• Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable.
• Add magnetic rings to the input drive cable.
Controller
interference during
running
• Connect the motor housing to the PE of the controller.
• Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains voltage.
• Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable and wind the cable
with magnetic rings.
• Add a safety capacitor to the interfered signal port or wind the signal
cable with magnetic rings.
• Connect the equipment to the common ground.
Communication
interference
• Connect the motor housing to the PE of the controller.
• Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains voltage.
• Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable and wind the cable
with magnetic rings.
• Add a matching resistor between the communication cable source
and the load side.
• Add a common grounding cable besides the communication cable.
• Use a shielded cable as the communication cable and connect the
cable shield to the common grounding point.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NICE1000 new User Manual EMC- 199 -
Interference Type Solution
I/O interference
• Enlarge the capacitance at the low-speed DI. A maximum of 0.11 uF
capacitance is suggested.
• Enlarge the capacitance at the AI. A maximum of 0.22 uF is
suggested.Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
EMC NICE1000new User Manual- 200 -Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Warranty Agreement
1. The warranty period of the product is 18 months from date of manufacturing. During the
warranty period, if the product fails or is damaged under the condition of normal use by
following the instructions, Inovance will be responsible for free maintenance.
2. Within the warranty period, maintenance will be charged for the damages caused by the
following reasons:
a. Improper use or repair/modification without prior permission
b. Fire, flood, abnormal voltage, other disasters and secondary disaster
c. Hardware damage caused by dropping or transportation after procurement
d. Improper operation
e. Damage out of the equipment (for example, external device)
3. If there is any failure or damage to the product, please correctly fill out the Product
Warranty Card in detail.
4. The maintenance fee is charged according to the latest Maintenance Price List of
Monarch.
5. The Product Warranty Card is not re-issued. Please keep the card and present it to the
maintenance personnel when asking for maintenance.
6. If there is any problem during the service, contact Monarch's agent or Monarch directly.
7. This agreement shall be interpreted by Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd.
Service Department, Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd.
Address: No.16, Youxiang Road, Yuexi Town, Wuzhong District, Suzhou, PRChina
P.C.: 215104
Website: http://www.szmctc.cnDownloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Product Warranty Card
Customer
information
Address:
Company name:
P.C.:
Contact person:
Tel. or Email:
Product
information
Product model:
Series No. (Attach here):
Name of supplier:
Failure
information
(eg. fault
code)
(Maintenance time and content):
Maintenance person:Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
No. 16, Youxiang Road, Yuexi Town, Wuzhong District, Suzhou, PRChina
+86-512-68795207
new
NICE1000
Integrated Elevator Controller
+86-512-62856720Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine